Audio, Visual & Navigation System: Section

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA
AV
A
B
SECTION
AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE) ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 29 F
PRECAUTION ............................................... 9 AV CONTROL UNIT .......................................... 29

Reference Value ......................................................29 G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 9 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ..................................33
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System DTC Index ...............................................................33
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ................................................................... 9 BOSE SPEAKER AMP ..................................... 35 H
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal, and AV Reference Value ......................................................35
Control Unit ............................................................... 9
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .............................. 9 WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 39 I
Precaution for Harness Repair .................................. 9
MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM) ...... 39
Precaution for Work ................................................ 10
Wiring Diagram ........................................................39
J
PREPARATION ........................................... 11 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 59
PREPARATION ..................................................11
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 59
Special Service Tools .............................................. 11 K
Work Flow ................................................................59
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 11
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 12
AV CONTROL UNIT .......................................... 61 L
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................12 Description ...............................................................61
Component Parts Location ...................................... 12 Work Procedure .......................................................61
AV Control Unit ....................................................... 13 M
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) ........ 63
BOSE Speaker Amp. (ANC/ASE) ........................... 14
Description ...............................................................63
Microphone (ANC/ASE) .......................................... 14
Work Procedure .......................................................63
Speakers ................................................................. 14
Configuration list ......................................................64 AV
Multifunction Switch ................................................ 16
Steering Switches ................................................... 16 REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) ........... 65
USB Interfaces and AUX In Jack ............................ 16 Description ...............................................................65
Microphone (Hands-free Phone/Voice Recogni- O
Work Procedure .......................................................65
tion) ......................................................................... 16
Antennas, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder ...... 17 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 66
P
SYSTEM .............................................................20 B1F01 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ..................... 66
System Description ................................................. 20 DTC Description ......................................................66
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................66
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)....25
Description .............................................................. 25 B1F02 DOOR STATUS SIGNAL ...................... 68
On Board Diagnosis Function ................................. 26 DTC Description ......................................................68
CONSULT Function ................................................ 28 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................68
Revision: May 2016 AV-1 2017 Maxima NAM

B1F0B, B1F0C, B1F0D, B1F0E ANC MIC1 U12B7 USB CONN ............................................ 97
CIRCUIT ............................................................. 70 DTC Description ...................................................... 97
DTC Description ..................................................... 70 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 97
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 71
U12BA MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH CONN ...... 98
B1F10, B1F11, B1F12, B1F13 ANC MIC2 DTC Description ...................................................... 98
CIRCUIT ............................................................. 73 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 98
DTC Description ..................................................... 73
U12BE RADIO ANTENNA CONN .................... 100
DTC Description .................................................... 100
B1F15, B1F16, B1F17, B1F18 ANC MIC3 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 100
CIRCUIT ............................................................. 76
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT .............................. 102
DTC Description ..................................................... 76
DTC Description .................................................... 102
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 102
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 79
U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV) ........................... 105
DTC Description ..................................................... 79
DTC Description .................................................... 105
U1601, U1609 DOOR WOOFER ...................... 106
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 81
DTC Description .................................................... 106
DTC Description ..................................................... 81
U1626, U162E FRONT SQUAWKER ............... 109
U121F AV CONTROL UNIT .............................. 83
DTC Description .................................................... 109
DTC Description ..................................................... 83
U162A CENTER SPEAKER ............................. 112
U1231 AMP TEMP ............................................. 84
DTC Description .................................................... 112
DTC Description ..................................................... 84
U170A, U1712 REAR DOOR SPEAKER ......... 114
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ................ 85
DTC Description .................................................... 114
DTC Description ..................................................... 85
U1721, U1729 WOOFER .................................. 117
U1244 GPS ANTENNA CONN .......................... 86
DTC Description .................................................... 117
DTC Description ..................................................... 86
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 120
U124E AMP CONN ............................................ 87
DTC Description ..................................................... 87 AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 120
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 87 AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 120
U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ............. 89 BOSE SPEAKER AMP ........................................... 121
DTC Description ..................................................... 89 BOSE SPEAKER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 121
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH .................................... 122
U1263 USB ........................................................ 91 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce-
DTC Description ..................................................... 91 dure ....................................................................... 122
TWEETER ......................................................... 124
U1266 TCU ........................................................ 92 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 124
DTC Description ..................................................... 92
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 92 CENTER SPEAKER ......................................... 127
U1267 METER CONN ........................................ 94
DTC Description ..................................................... 94 FRONT DOOR TWEETER ............................... 129
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 94 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 129
U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR .................. 96 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 132

DTC Description ..................................................... 96 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 132

REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 135 Removal and Installation ....................................... 173
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 135 A
SUBWOOFER ................................................. 174
REAR SUBWOOFER ....................................... 138 Exploded View ....................................................... 174
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 138 Removal and Installation ....................................... 174
B
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 141 BOSE SPEAKER AMP ................................... 175
Exploded View ....................................................... 175
WITH TELEMATICS SYSTEM ................................ 141 Removal and Installation ....................................... 175 C
WITH TELEMATICS SYSTEM : Diagnosis Proce-
dure ....................................................................... 141 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ...................... 177
Removal and Installation ....................................... 177
WITHOUT TELEMATICS SYSTEM ......................... 142 Disassembly and Assembly ................................... 177 D
WITHOUT TELEMATICS SYSTEM : Diagnosis
Procedure .............................................................. 143 ANTENNA AMP. ............................................. 178
Removal and Installation ....................................... 178 E
ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL MICROPHONE .... 145
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 145 GPS ANTENNA ............................................... 179
STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 146 F
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 146 MICROPHONE ................................................ 180
USB INTERFACE ............................................. 148
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 148 ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL MICROPHONE ... 181 G
Removal and Installation - Front ............................ 181
AUX IN JACK ................................................... 150 Removal and Installation - Rear ............................ 181
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 150 H
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................ 182
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 151 Removal and Installation ....................................... 182
MULTI AV SYSTEM ......................................... 151 MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE) I
Symptom Table ..................................................... 151
PRECAUTION ............................................ 183
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 155
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 183 J
Description ............................................................ 155
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 164 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ............................................................... 183 K
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 164 Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal, and AV
Exploded View ...................................................... 164 Control Unit ............................................................ 183
Removal and Installation ....................................... 164 Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 183
Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 183 L
STEERING SWITCHES .................................... 166 Precaution for Work ............................................... 184
Exploded View ...................................................... 166
Removal and Installation ....................................... 166 PREPARATION ......................................... 185 M
USB INTERFACE AND AUX IN JACK ............ 168 PREPARATION ............................................... 185
Removal and Installation ....................................... 168 Special Service Tools ............................................ 185
Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 185 AV
INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER ................... 169
Removal and Installation ....................................... 169 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 186
CENTER SPEAKER ......................................... 170 O
COMPONENT PARTS .................................... 186
Removal and Installation ....................................... 170 Component Parts Location .................................... 186
AV Control Unit ...................................................... 187
FRONT TWEETER ........................................... 171 Speakers ............................................................... 187 P
Exploded View ...................................................... 171 Multifunction Switch ............................................... 188
Removal and Installation ....................................... 171 Steering Switches .................................................. 189
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ............................... 172 USB Interfaces and AUX In Jack ........................... 189
Exploded View ...................................................... 172 Microphone (Hands-free Phone/Voice Recogni-
Removal and Installation ....................................... 172 tion) ........................................................................ 189
Antennas, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder ..... 189
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 173
SYSTEM ........................................................... 192 U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ............ 234
System Description ................................................192 DTC Description .................................................... 234
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) . 196
Description .............................................................196 U1263 USB ....................................................... 236
On Board Diagnosis Function ................................197 DTC Description .................................................... 236
CONSULT Function ...............................................198 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 236
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 200 U1267 METER CONN ...................................... 237
DTC Description .................................................... 237
AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 200 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 237
Reference Value ....................................................200
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................204 U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR ................. 239
DTC Index .............................................................204 DTC Description .................................................... 239
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 205
U12B7 USB CONN ........................................... 240
MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYS- DTC Description .................................................... 240
TEM) ................................................................. 205 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 240
Wiring Diagram ......................................................205
U12BA MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH CONN ..... 241
BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 220 DTC Description .................................................... 241
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ....... 220
Work Flow ..............................................................220 U12BE RADIO ANTENNA CONN .................... 243
DTC Description .................................................... 243
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 243
AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 222
Description .............................................................222 U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT .............................. 245
Work Procedure .....................................................222 DTC Description .................................................... 245
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) ...... 224
Description .............................................................224 U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV) ........................... 248
Work Procedure .....................................................224 DTC Description .................................................... 248
Configuration list ....................................................225
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 249
REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) .......... 226
AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 249
Description .............................................................226
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 249
Work Procedure .....................................................226
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH .................................... 250
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 227 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce-
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .......................... 227 dure ....................................................................... 250
DTC Description ....................................................227 TWEETER ......................................................... 252
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................227 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 252
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 229 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 254
DTC Description ....................................................229 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 254
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................229
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 256
U121F AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 231 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 256
DTC Description ....................................................231
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................231 REAR SPEAKER .............................................. 258
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .............. 232
DTC Description ....................................................232 MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 260
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................232 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 260
U1244 GPS ANTENNA CONN ........................ 233 STEERING SWITCH ......................................... 262
DTC Description ....................................................233 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 262
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................233
USB INTERFACE ............................................. 264

Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 264 Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal, and AV
Control Unit ............................................................ 294 A
AUX IN JACK ................................................... 266 Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 294
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 266 Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 294
Precaution for Work ............................................... 295
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 267 B
PREPARATION ......................................... 296
MULTI AV SYSTEM ......................................... 267
Symptom Table ..................................................... 267 PREPARATION ............................................... 296 C
Special Service Tools ............................................ 296
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 271
Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 296
Description ............................................................ 271
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 297 D
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 280
COMPONENT PARTS .................................... 297
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 280
Component Parts Location .................................... 297 E
Exploded View ...................................................... 280
Around View Monitor Control Unit ......................... 297
Front Camera ........................................................ 298
STEERING SWITCHES .................................... 282 Side Camera .......................................................... 298
F
Exploded View ...................................................... 282 Rear Camera ......................................................... 298
Removal and Installation ....................................... 282 Steering Angle Sensor ........................................... 298
USB INTERFACE AND AUX IN JACK ............ 284 SYSTEM .......................................................... 299 G
Removal and Installation ....................................... 284 System Description ................................................ 299
Fail-Safe ................................................................ 305
INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER ................... 285 H
Removal and Installation ....................................... 285 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MON-
ITOR CONTROL UNIT) ................................... 307
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ............................... 286 CONSULT Function ............................................... 307
Exploded View ...................................................... 286 I
Removal and Installation ....................................... 286 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 309
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 287 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT . 309
J
Removal and Installation ....................................... 287 Reference Value .................................................... 309
Fail-Safe ................................................................ 311
REAR SPEAKER ............................................. 288 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 312
Exploded View ...................................................... 288 DTC Index ............................................................. 312 K
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 314
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ....................... 289
L
Removal and Installation ....................................... 289 AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ............. 314
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 289 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 314
ANTENNA AMP. .............................................. 290 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 323 M

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ...... 323
GPS ANTENNA ................................................ 291 Work Flow .............................................................. 323
Removal and Installation ....................................... 291 AV
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
MICROPHONE ................................................. 292 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT . 325
Removal and Installation ....................................... 292 Description ............................................................. 325 O
Work Procedure ..................................................... 325
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................. 293
Removal and Installation ....................................... 293 CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONI-
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM TOR CONTROL UNIT) .................................... 326 P
Description ............................................................. 326
PRECAUTION ............................................ 294 Work Procedure ..................................................... 326
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 294 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................ 327
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION
SIONER" ............................................................... 294 ADJUSTMENT ......................................................... 327

PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSI- POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 357
TION ADJUSTMENT : Description ........................327 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 357
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSI-
TION ADJUSTMENT : Work Procedure ................327 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 358
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM .............. 358
MONITOR) ................................................................327 Symptom Table ..................................................... 358
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND
VIEW MONITOR) : Description .............................327 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 359
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND
VIEW MONITOR) : Work Procedure .....................327
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT .. 359
Exploded View ...................................................... 359
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 333 Removal and Installation ....................................... 359
U0428 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .............. 333 FRONT CAMERA ............................................. 360
DTC Description ....................................................333 Removal and Installation ....................................... 360
SIDE CAMERA ................................................. 361
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .......................... 335 Removal and Installation ....................................... 361
DTC Description ....................................................335
REAR CAMERA ............................................... 362
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................335
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 337 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
DTC Description ....................................................337
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................337 PRECAUTION ........................................... 363
U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIR- PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 363

CUIT ................................................................. 338 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
DTC Description ....................................................338 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................338 SIONER" ............................................................... 363
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal, and AV
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL Control Unit ........................................................... 363
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 341 Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 363
DTC Description ....................................................341 Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 363
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................341 Precaution for Work .............................................. 364
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL PREPARATION ......................................... 365

CIRCUIT ........................................................... 344
DTC Description ....................................................344
PREPARATION ................................................ 365
Special Service Tools ........................................... 365
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 365
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 347 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 366
DTC Description ....................................................347 COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 366
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................347 Component Parts Location ................................... 366
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .............. 350 AV Control Unit ..................................................... 366
Rear View Camera ................................................ 367
DTC Description ....................................................350
Steering Angle Sensor .......................................... 367
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT ..................... 351 SYSTEM ........................................................... 368

System Description ............................................... 368
DTC Description ....................................................351
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................351 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) .. 369
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION ....... 355 MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE) ............................... 369
DTC Description ....................................................355 MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE) : Description ....... 369
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................355 MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE) : On Board Diag-
nosis Function ....................................................... 370
U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH .............................. 356
MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE) : CONSULT Func-
DTC Description ....................................................356
tion ........................................................................ 373

MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE) ....................... 373 PREPARATION ............................................... 403
MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE) : Description.. 373 Special Service Tools ............................................ 403 A
MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE) : On Board Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 403
Diagnosis Function ................................................ 374
MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE) : CONSULT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 404
B
Function ................................................................ 376
COMPONENT PARTS .................................... 404
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 378 Component Parts Location .................................... 404
AV Control Unit ...................................................... 405 C
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 378 TCU ....................................................................... 405
Telematics Antenna ............................................... 405
MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE) ............................... 378
Telematics Switch .................................................. 406 D
MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE) : Reference Value.. 378
Microphone ............................................................ 406
MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE) ....................... 381
SYSTEM .......................................................... 407
MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE) : Reference E
Value ..................................................................... 381 TELEMATICS SYSTEM ........................................... 407
TELEMATICS SYSTEM : System Description ...... 407
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 385 TELEMATICS SYSTEM : Fail-safe ....................... 407
F
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM .................... 385 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCU) .......................... 409
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 385 CONSULT Function ............................................... 409
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 392 G
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 411
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ....... 392 TCU ................................................................. 411
Work Flow ............................................................. 392 Reference Value .................................................... 411 H
Fail-safe ................................................................. 413
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 394
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 414
REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIR- DTC Index ............................................................. 414 I
CUIT .................................................................. 394
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 416
TELEMATICS SYSTEM .................................. 416 J
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 397 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 416
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM .................... 397
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 420 K
Symptom Table ..................................................... 397
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ..... 420
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 398 Work Flow .............................................................. 420
L
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 398 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Exploded View ...................................................... 398
TCU ................................................................. 422
Description ............................................................. 422 M
REAR VIEW CAMERA ..................................... 400 Work Procedure ..................................................... 422
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 425
TELEMATICS SYSTEM AV
B130D TCU ..................................................... 425
PRECAUTION ............................................ 401 DTC Description .................................................... 425
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 401 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 425 O
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System B1310 TCU ...................................................... 427
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- DTC Description .................................................... 427
SIONER" ............................................................... 401 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 427 P
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal, and AV
Control Unit ........................................................... 401 B13D9 TCU ..................................................... 428
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 401 DTC Description .................................................... 428
Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 401 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 428
Precaution for Work .............................................. 402
B13E1 TCU ..................................................... 429
PREPARATION ......................................... 403 DTC Description .................................................... 429

Diagnosis Procedure .............................................429 DTC Description .................................................... 445
B2E33 TELEMATICS SWITCH ....................... 430
DTC Description ....................................................430 U1A0C MICROPHONE ..................................... 447
B2EF0 TCU ...................................................... 432
DTC Description ....................................................432 U1A0E TELEMATICS SWITCH ....................... 449
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .......................... 434
DTC Description ....................................................434 U1A10 TCU ....................................................... 451
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................434 DTC Description .................................................... 451
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 435
DTC Description ....................................................435 U1A11 TCU ....................................................... 452
U1A00 TCU ...................................................... 436
DTC Description ....................................................436 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 454
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................436 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 454
U1A01 TCU ...................................................... 437 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 455

DTC Description ....................................................437
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................437 TELEMATICS SYSTEM ................................... 455
Symptom Table ..................................................... 455
U1A03 TCU ...................................................... 438
DTC Description ....................................................438 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 456
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................438 Description ............................................................ 456
U1A04 TCU ...................................................... 439 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 457

DTC Description ....................................................439
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................439 AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 457
Exploded View ...................................................... 457
U1A06 TEL ANTENNA .................................... 440 Removal and Installation ....................................... 457
DTC Description ....................................................440
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................440 TCU ................................................................... 459
U1A09 GPS ANTENNA ................................... 442
DTC Description ....................................................442 TELEMATICS SWITCH .................................... 460
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................442 Removal and Installation ....................................... 460
U1A0A TCU ..................................................... 444 TEL ANTENNA ................................................. 461

DTC Description ....................................................444 Removal and Installation ....................................... 461
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................444 MICROPHONE ................................................. 462
U1A0B MICROPHONE .................................... 445 Removal and Installation ....................................... 462

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE)]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000014276083
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, it is recommended that all mainte-
nance and repair be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
• Improper repair, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module,
see the SR section.
F
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the H
Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the I
battery or batteries, and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal, and AV Control Unit INFOID:0000000014275710
J
CAUTION:
Remove battery terminal, display control unit, and AV control unit after a lapse of 30 seconds or more
after turning the ignition switch OFF. K
NOTE:
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the display control unit, and the AV control unit continues operating for
approximately 30 seconds.
L
Therefore, data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000014275711
M
M-CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less. AV
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000014275712 O
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
P

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE)]
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]
PKIA0306E
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000014275713
• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
- Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
- Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
- Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
- For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE)]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000014275714
B
The actual shape of the tools may differ from those illustrated here.
Tool number Description
(TechMate No.) C
Tool name
— Removing trim components
(J-46534) D
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ
F
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000014275715
G
Tool name Description
Power tool Loosening nuts, screws and bolts
H
PIIB1407E
AV

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE)]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000014275716
AWNIA4429ZZ
A. View of instrument panel lower console B. View of overhead console

COMPONENT PARTS
No. Component Function A

1. BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-14, "BOSE Speaker Amp. (ANC/ASE)".
2. Rear subwoofer RH Refer to AV-14, "Speakers".
Rear microphone (active noise
B
3. Refer to AV-14, "Microphone (ANC/ASE)".
control)
4. Satellite Antenna
Refer to AV-17, "Antennas, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder". C
5. Antenna amp.
Front right microphone (active
noise control)
D
7. Rear door speaker RH
8. Front door tweeter RH
Refer to AV-14, "Speakers"
9. Tweeter RH E
10. Front door speaker RH
11. GPS antenna Refer to AV-17, "Antennas, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder".
F
12. Center speaker Refer to AV-14, "Speakers".
13. AV control unit Refer to AV-13, "AV Control Unit".
14. Tweeter LH G
15. Front door speaker LH Refer to AV-14, "Speakers".
16. Front door tweeter LH
17. Multifunction switch Refer to AV-16, "Multifunction Switch".
H
18. Steering switches Refer to AV-16, "Steering Switches".

19. Rear door speaker LH Refer to AV-14, "Speakers".
I
Front left microphone (active noise
control)
21. Rear subwoofer LH Refer to AV-14, "Speakers". J
22. USB interface-1
23. USB interface-2 Refer to AV-16, "USB Interfaces and AUX In Jack".
24. AUX in jack K
25. Microphone Refer to AV-16, "Microphone (Hands-free Phone/Voice Recognition)".
AV Control Unit INFOID:0000000014275717 L
• AV control unit is located in the center of the instrument panel.

• AV control unit controls the audio system of Multi AV system. M
• AV control unit controls the navigation system of Multi AV system.
• AV control unit can store applications in the built-in memory by
connecting a cell phone via Bluetooth® communication or USB
communication. AV
ALNIA1763ZZ

COMPONENT PARTS
BOSE Speaker Amp. (ANC/ASE) INFOID:0000000014275718
The BOSE speaker amp. is located on the underside of the rear par-
cel shelf, in the trunk.
Audio Operation
• The BOSE speaker amp. receives audio signals from AV control
unit and outputs amplified audio signals to each speaker, tweeter,
and subwoofer.
Active Noise Cancellation (ANC)
• The BOSE speaker amp. outputs out of phase audio signals to the
speakers, tweeters, and subwoofers to cancel noise from the
engine. JSNIA5816ZZ
• The ANC algorithms for the BOSE speaker amp. use the RPM sig-
nal from the ECM and the ANC/ASE microphone signals to calculate the correct output signals to the speak-
ers, tweeters, and subwoofers.
Active Sound Enhancement (ASE)
• The BOSE speaker amp. outputs audio signals to the speakers, tweeters, and subwoofers to enhance the
sound of the engine.
• The ASE algorithms for the BOSE speaker amp. use the RPM signal from the ECM and the ANC/ASE
microphone signals to calculate the correct output signals to the speakers, tweeters, and subwoofers.
Microphone (ANC/ASE) INFOID:0000000014275719
• The front right, front left and rear microphones (active noise con-
trol) are installed in the headliner.
• The microphones are used for Active Noise Cancellation (ANC)
and Active Sound Enhancement (ASE).
• Power is supplied from the BOSE speaker amp. to the micro-
phones.
JSNIA6195ZZ
Speakers INFOID:0000000014275720
TWEETER
• 2 in (5.01 cm) speakers are installed in the top corners of the
instrument panel.
• Sound signals generated by the BOSE speaker amp. output high
range sounds.
ALNIA1840ZZ
CENTER SPEAKER

COMPONENT PARTS
• 3 in (7.62 cm) speaker is installed in the center of the instrument
panel. A
• Sound signals generated by the BOSE speaker amp. output high
and mid range sounds.
B
JSNIA5817ZZ
D
FRONT DOOR TWEETER
• 1 in (2.5 cm) speakers are installed in the front door mirror corner
covers.
• Sound signals generated by the BOSE speaker amp. output high E
range sounds.
G
JSNIA5577ZZ
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER H

• 6 x 9 in (15.2 x 22.9 cm) speakers are installed in the front side
bottom of the front doors.
• Sound signals generated by the BOSE speaker amp. output low
range sounds. I
K
ALNIA1765ZZ
REAR DOOR SPEAKER

• 4 in (10.2 cm) speakers are installed in the front side center of the L
rear doors.
• Sound signals generated by the BOSE speaker amp. output mid
range sounds. M
AV
JSNIA5958ZZ O
REAR SUBWOOFERS
P

COMPONENT PARTS
• 6 x 9 in (15.2 x 22.9 cm) speakers are installed in the top of the
rear parcel shelf.
• Sound signals generated by the AV control unit output low range
sounds.
ALNIA1765ZZ
Multifunction Switch INFOID:0000000014275721
• Multifunction switch is located on the center console.

• The multifunction switch allows for navigation of the following func-
tions of the AV control unit:
- Audio
- Phone
- Info
- MENU
- Map
- Navi
- Settings
JSNIA6001ZZ
Steering Switches INFOID:0000000014275722
• Hands-free phone, navigation, and audio operations can be per-

formed.
• This switch is connected to combination meter, and switch opera-
tion signal is transmitted to combination meter.
• Combination meter transmits steering switch signal to AV control
unit via AV communication.
AWNIA4088ZZ
USB Interfaces and AUX In Jack INFOID:0000000014275723
• The USB interface and AUX in jack is located in the lower instru-
ment panel console box.
• The components of the USB interface and AUX in jack are the
USB interface-1, USB interface-2 and AUX in jack.
• iPod® and USB memory can be connected to the AV control unit
through the USB interfaces.
• An external audio device can be connected to the AV control unit
through the AUX in jack.
ALNIA1764ZZ
Microphone (Hands-free Phone/Voice Recognition) INFOID:0000000014275724
WITH TELEMATICS SYSTEM

COMPONENT PARTS
• Microphone is installed on the map lamp assembly.
• The microphone is used for the operation of the NISSANCON- A
NECTSM system, hands-free phone communication and voice rec-
ognition functions.
• Power is supplied from the TCU. B
• The microphone transmits sound signals to the TCU during opera-
tion of the NISSANCONNECTSM system, hands-free phone com-
munication and voice recognition.
C
JSNIA6009ZZ
D
WITHOUT TELEMATICS SYSTEM
• The microphone is installed on the map lamp assembly.
• Power is supplied from the AV control unit.
• The microphone transmits sound signals to the AV control unit dur- E
ing hands-free phone communication and voice recognition.
JSNIA6009ZZ
Antennas, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder INFOID:0000000014275725 H
GPS ANTENNA
• GPS antenna is installed in the instrument panel. I
• The antenna amplifies radio waves received from the GPS satellite
and transmits the GPS signal to the AV control unit.
J
NOTE:
An object on the instrument panel may cause the reception sensitiv-
ity to be decreased.
K
JSNIA5132ZZ L
SATELLITE ANTENNA
• Satellite radio antenna is installed to the rear center of the roof.
• Receives satellite radio waves and outputs them to AV control unit. M
AV
AWNIA4089ZZ
P
ANTENNA AMP. AND RADIO ANTENNA

COMPONENT PARTS
• Antenna amp. is located on the passenger side inner C-pillar.
AWNIA4087ZZ
• AM/FM radio main antenna and FM radio sub antenna are located in the rear window glass.
• The AM/FM radio main antenna path has an antenna amp. to obtain sufficient reception power.
JSNIA4204GB
CAUTION:
Affixing any mirror-type window films or metallic items (e.g. commercial antenna) on the rear window
glass causes a reduction in the radio receiver sensitivity.
ANTENNA FEEDER
AWNIA4428ZZ

COMPONENT PARTS
1. R203 2. R202 3. Antenna amp. A

4. R204, R205 5. R206 6. R200, R201, M198, M199
7. M166 8. M165 9. M167
B
AV

SYSTEM
SYSTEM
System Description INFOID:0000000014275726
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
AWNIA4431GB
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components:
• AV control unit
• BOSE speaker amp.
• Steering switches
• Tweeters
• Center speaker
• Front door tweeters
• Front door speakers
• Rear door speakers
• Rear subwoofers
• AM/FM antenna and antenna amp.
• Glass antenna (FM sub)
When the audio system is on, radio signals received by the AM/FM antenna are amplified by the antenna amp.
The amplified AM/FM antenna and glass antenna (FM sub) radio signals are sent to the AV control unit. The
AV control unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the speakers, tweeters and subwoofers.
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM
The satellite radio system consists of the following components:
• Satellite antenna
• AV control unit
When the satellite radio system is on, radio signals are supplied to the AV control unit from the satellite
antenna. The AV control unit then sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker amp.
amplifies the audio signals before sending them to the speakers, tweeters and subwoofers.
SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for satellite radio system operating instructions.
A
BOSE SPEAKER AMP. (ANC/ASE) SYSTEM
The BOSE speaker amp. active noise cancellation/active sound enhancement system consists of the following
components:
• Front left, front right and rear microphones (active noise control) B
• Tweeters
• Center speaker C
• Front door tweeters
• Rear subwoofers D
The Active Noise Cancellation system is designed to reduce low frequency noise in the interior. The system
operates whenever the vehicle is running, whether the audio system is on or off. The active noise control
microphones capture low-end drivetrain frequencies entering the interior and send a signal to the BOSE E
speaker amp. The BOSE speaker amp. uses the microphone signal along with the RPM signal from the ECM
to create a precisely timed reverse phase audio signal and send it to the speakers.
The Active Sound Enhancement system is designed to enhance the sound of the engine. The system oper-
ates whenever the vehicle is running, whether the audio system is on or off. The active noise control micro- F
phones capture drivetrain frequencies entering the interior and send a signal to the BOSE speaker amp. The
BOSE speaker amp. uses the microphone signal along with the RPM signal from the ECM to generate a com-
plimentary audio signal and send it to the speakers. G
USB INTERFACE
• USB interface 1 and 2 are located in the lower instrument panel console box.
• When iPod® or USB memory is connected to the USB port, the USB interface transmits the music data and H
text data in iPod® or USB memory device to the AV control unit via USB communication.
• The AV control unit transmits the sound signal to the BOSE speaker amp.
• BOSE speaker amp. transmits the sound signal received from AV control unit to each speaker. I
• When AV control unit receives the text data from USB interface, it displays the text data (artist, album, and
song title) on the AV control unit display.
AUX J
• Auxiliary input jack is located in the lower instrument panel console box.
• Auxiliary input jack consist of the sound input terminal.
• When sound data is input into the sound input terminal, the AUX in jack transmits the AUX sound signal to K
the AV control unit.
• When AV control unit receives the AUX in jack sound signal, it transmits the sound signal to BOSE speaker
amp. L
• BOSE speaker amp. transmits the sound signal received from AV control unit to each speaker.
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
System Operation M
NOTE:
Cellular telephones must have their wireless connection set up (paired) before using the Bluetooth® telephone
system. AV
The Bluetooth® telephone system allows users who have a Bluetooth® cellular telephone to make a wireless
connection between their cellular telephone and the AV control unit. Hands-free cellular telephone calls can be
sent and received. Some Bluetooth® cellular telephones may not be recognized by the AV control unit. When O
a cellular telephone or the AV control unit is replaced, the telephone must be paired with the AV control unit.
Different cellular telephones may have different pairing procedures, refer to the cellular telephone operating
manual. P
Refer to the Owner's Manual for Bluetooth® telephone system operating instructions.
AV Control Unit
When the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, the AV control unit will power up. During power up, the AV
control unit is initialized and performs various self-checks. Initialization may take up to 20 seconds. If a phone
is present in the vehicle and paired with the AV control unit, Voice Recognition will then become active.
Steering Switches

SYSTEM
When buttons on the steering switch are pushed, the resistance in steering switch circuit changes, depending
on which button is pushed. The AV control unit uses this signal to perform various functions while navigating
through the voice recognition system.
The following functions can be performed using the steering switch:
• Initiate self-diagnosis of the Bluetooth® telephone system
• Start a voice recognition session
• Answer and end telephone calls
• Adjust the volume of calls
• Record memos
Microphone
The microphone is located in the roof console assembly. The microphone sends a signal to the AV control unit.
The microphone can be actively tested during self-diagnosis.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Operation
NOTE:
Refer to NAVI System Owner's Manual for system operation.
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current position according to the following three
signals: Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor, turning angle of the vehicle
as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor), and the direction of vehicle travel as determined by
the GPS antenna (GPS information).
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the calculated vehicle position with map data
read from the map data, which is stored in the hard disk drive (HDD) (map-matching), and indicated on the
screen with a current-location mark.
By comparing the vehicle position detection results found by the

GPS and by map-matching, more accurate vehicle position data can
be used.
The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the dis-
tance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its
direction.
SEL684V
Travel Distance
Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed input signal. Therefore, the calculation may
become incorrect as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance fine adjustment function has
been adopted.
Travel Direction
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS
antenna (GPS information). As the gyroscope and GPS antenna have both merit and demerit, input signals
from them are prioritized in each situation. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with more
detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is detected more accurately.
Type Advantage Disadvantage

• Direction errors may accumulate when the ve-
• Can detect the vehicle's turning angle quite
Gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) hicle is driven for long distances without stop-
accurately.
ping.
• Can detect the vehicle's travel direction • Correct direction cannot be detected when the
GPS antenna (GPS information)
(North/South/East/West). vehicle speed is low.
Map–Matching

SYSTEM
Map–matching is a function that repositions the vehicle on the road
map when a new location is judged to be the most accurate. This is A
done by comparing the current vehicle position, calculated by the
method described in the position detection principle, with the road
map data around the vehicle, read from the map data stored on the
B
HDD.
Therefore, the vehicle position may not be corrected after the vehicle
is driven over a certain distance or time in which GPS information is
hard to receive. In this case, the current-location mark on the display C
must be corrected manually.
CAUTION:
SEL685V
The road map data is based on data stored on the HDD. D
• In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will be
shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is cur-
rently driven has been judged and the current-location mark has
been repositioned. E
If there is an error in distance and/or direction, the alternative
routes will be shown in different order of priority, and the wrong
road can be avoided. F
If two roads are running in parallel, they are of the same priority.
Therefore, the current-location mark may appear on either of them
alternately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and
configuration of the road. G
SEL686V
• Map-matching does not function correctly when the road on which H

the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded on the HDD, or when
the road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road pattern
are different due to repair.
When driving on a road not present in the map, the map-matching I
function may find another road and position the current-location
mark on it. Then, when the correct road is detected, the current-
location mark may leap to it. J
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direc-
tion calculated by the distance and direction with the road data
read from the HDD is limited. Therefore, when there is an exces-
sive gap between the current vehicle position and the position on
ALNIA0671GB
K
the map, correction by map-matching is not possible.
GPS (Global Positioning System)
GPS (Global Positioning System) has been developed and con- L
trolled by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS
satellite (NAVSTAR), sending out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at the height of approx. 21,000 km (13,000 mi). M
The GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in three dimen-
sions (latitude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the
radio waves received from four or more GPS satellites (three-dimen-
AV
sional positioning). If radio waves were received only from three
GPS satellites, the GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in
two dimensions (latitude/longitude), utilizing the altitude data calcu-
lated previously by using radio waves from four or more GPS satel- O
SEL526V
lites (two-dimensional positioning).
Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions:
• In two-dimensional positioning, the GPS accuracy will deteriorate when the altitude of the vehicle position
P
changes.
• There may be an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft.) in position detected by three-dimensional positioning,
which is more accurate than two-dimensional positioning. The accuracy can be even lower depending on the
arrangement of the GPS satellites utilized for the positioning.
• Position detection is not possible when the vehicle is in an area where radio waves from the GPS satellite do
not reach, such as in a tunnel, parking lot in a building, and under an elevated highway. Radio waves from
the GPS satellites may not be received when some object is located over the GPS antenna.
• Position correction by GPS is not available while the vehicle is stopped.

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
Description INFOID:0000000014275727
AV control unit on board diagnosis performs the following functions listed in the table below:
Mode Description
• AV control unit diagnosis.
• Diagnoses the connections between system components:
- between Control Unit (AV control unit) and Cluster (combination
meter).
- between Control Unit (AV control unit) and IT-Commander (multifunc-
tion switch).
Self Diagnosis
- between Control Unit (AV control unit) and Amplifier (Bose speaker
amp.).
- between Control Unit (AV control unit) and XM antenna.
- between Control Unit (AV control unit) and GPS antenna.
- between Control Unit (AV control unit) and TCU (Telematics control
unit).
The following functions are available:
• Color Spectrum Bar provides a color tone check by color bar display.
• Gradation Bar provides a light and shade check by gray scale display.
Display Diagnosis • Touch Panel:
- Touch Panel Calibration.
- Touch Panel Response Check.
• White Display provides a white shade check by white display.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake,
Vehicle Signals
lights, ignition and reverse.
Navigation Sensor Information can be displayed.
The system malfunction and the frequency when occurring in the past
Error Location Display are displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and
place that the selected malfunction last occurred is displayed.
AV COMM Diagnosis The communication condition of system components can be monitored.
• Phone Volume Adjustment.
### Hands-free Phone, Nis-
• ### Voice Microphone Test.
sanConnect Services
• Maintenance.
• Bluetooth Device Information.
Confirmation/Adjustment The following functions are available:

• Alter/Confirm Configuration.
Camera
• Reset Configuration.
• Camera Syst Type.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history.
Reset Settings • User Data Initialization.
• Factory Configuration Data Initialization.
Version Information Version information of the AV control unit is displayed.
Software Update Software update can be performed.
The connection of the speakers can be confirmed by individual test
Speaker Test
tones.
• Status.
ANC/ASC • Setting.
• Connection Diagnosis.
• Active Test.
SXM • Diagnostic Mode Display.
• External Diagnostic Mode.

Perform CONSULT diagnosis if the AV control unit on board diagnosis does not start or the screen does not
display anything. A
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000014275728
B
METHOD OF STARTING
1. Turn the ignition ON.
2. Turn the audio system OFF.
3. Press and hold the MENU button. C
ALNIA1766ZZ F
4. While menu button is being held, rotate the volume knob left at
least 7 clicks, right at least 7 clicks and left again at least 7 G
clicks.
ALNIA1767ZZ
J
5. The System Diagnostic Menu screen is displayed, and “Self Diagnosis” or “Confirmation/Adjustment” can
be selected.
K
SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE
AV Control Unit Self Diagnosis
1. Select Self Diagnosis. L
2. Self diagnosis screen is displayed. The bar graph visible in center of screen indicates progress of self
diagnosis.
3. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is completed. The unit names and the connection
M
lines are color-coded according to the diagnostic results.
Diagnosis results Unit Connection line

AV
Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow
Unit malfunction 1 Red Green O

1: Control Unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red.
• Replace AV control unit if Self Diagnosis did not run because control unit malfunction is indicated. The symptom is AV control
unit internal error. Refer to AV-164, "Removal and Installation". P
• If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined according to the following order
of priority: red > gray.
AV Control Unit Self Diagnosis Results

Only Unit Part Is Displayed In Red

Screen switch Description Possible cause
• AV control unit power supply and ground
circuits. Refer to AV-120, "AV CONTROL
UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Malfunction is detected in AV control unit
Control Unit • If no malfunction is detected in AV control
power supply and ground circuits.
unit power supply and ground circuits, re-
place AV control unit. Refer to AV-164,
"Removal and Installation".
• Combination meter power supply and
ground circuits. Refer to MWI-59, "COM-
BINATION METER : Diagnosis Proce-
Malfunction is detected in combination dure".
Cluster
meter power supply and ground circuits. • If no malfunction is detected in combina-
tion meter power supply and ground cir-
cuits, replace combination meter. Refer
to MWI-77, "Removal and Installation".
• Multifunction switch power supply and
ground circuits. Refer to AV-122, "MULTI-
FUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce-
Malfunction is detected in multifunction dure".
IT-Commander
switch power supply and ground circuits. • If no malfunction is detected in multifunc-
tion switch power supply and ground cir-
cuits, replace multifunction switch. Refer
to AV-182, "Removal and Installation".
• Bose speaker amp. power supply and
ground circuits. Refer to AV-121, "BOSE
SPEAKER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure".
Malfunction is detected in Bose speaker
Amplifier • If no malfunction is detected in Bose
amp. power supply and ground circuits.
speaker amp. power supply and ground
circuits, replace Bose speaker amp. Re-
fer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation".
• TCU power supply and ground circuits.
Refer to AV-454, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Malfunction is detected in TCU power sup- • If no malfunction is detected in TCU pow-
TCU
ply and ground circuits. er supply and ground circuits, replace
TCU. Refer to AV-459, "Removal and In-
stallation".
A Connecting Cable Between Units Is Displayed In Yellow

Area with yellow connection lines Description Possible cause
AV communication circuits between multi-
IT-Commander ⇔ Control Unit function switch and AV control unit are mal-
functioning.
AV communication circuits between combi-
AV communication circuits. Refer to AV-
Cluster ⇔ Control Unit nation meter and AV control unit are mal-
102, "DTC Description".
functioning.
AV communication circuits between AV
Control Unit ⇔ Amplifier control unit and Bose speaker amp. are
malfunctioning.
Satellite radio antenna connection malfunc- Satellite radio antenna disconnected. Refer
Control Unit ⇔ XM Antenna
tion is detected. to AV-89, "DTC Description".
GPS antenna connection malfunction is de- GPS antenna connector disconnected. Re-
Control Unit ⇔ GPS Antenna
tected. fer to AV-86, "DTC Description".
AV communication circuits between AV AV communication circuits. Refer to AV-
Control Unit ⇔ TCU
control unit and TCU are malfunctioning. 102, "DTC Description".
AV Control Unit Confirmation/Adjustment

1. Select Confirmation/Adjustment.
2. Select an available option on the Confirmation/Adjustment screen to display the relevant diagnosis or A
adjustment screen. Press the icon to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjustment screen.
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000014275729
B
CONSULT FUNCTIONS
CONSULT performs the following functions via communication with the AV control unit:
C
Direct Diagnostic Mode Description
Ecu Identification The AV control unit part number is displayed.
D
Self Diagnostic Result The AV control unit self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The AV control unit input/output data is displayed in real time.
Work support The settings for AV control unit functions can be changed. E
• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
Configuration
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing AV control unit.
CAN Diag Support Mntr

• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of AV communication is displayed. F
• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed. G
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

Refer to AV-33, "DTC Index".
H
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit] Description I

Indicates vehicle speed signal received from combination meter on CAN communication
VHCL SPD SIG [On/Off]
line.
PKB SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of park brake signal. J
ILLUM SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of illumination signal for the multifunction switch and preset switch.
IGN SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of ignition signal.
K
REV SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of reverse signal received from BCM.
WORK SUPPORT
L
Conditions Description
Steering angle sensor neutral position adjustment can be per-
ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT
formed. M
CONFIGURATION
Refer to AV-63, "Description".
AV
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Refer to LAN-14, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor".
O

AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE)]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

AV CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000014275730
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status

Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH). Off
VHCL SPD SIG
Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH). On
Illumination signal is not received. Off
ILLUM SIG
Illumination signal is received. On
Ignition switch OFF or ACC. Off
IGN SIG
Ignition switch ON. On
Selector lever in any position other than R. Off
REV SIG
Selector lever in R position. On
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA4127ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
2 3 Ignition switch ON
Sound signal LH Output
(G) (R) • Sound output
SKIB3609E
4 5
Voice guidance signal — — —
(B) (W)
7
Ground ACC power supply Input Ignition switch ACC Battery voltage
(P)

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
9 8 B
Illumination control signal Input Headlamps ON Battery voltage
(R) (GR)
10
— Sound signal shield — — —
(Shield) C
D
Sound signal RH Output
(B) (W) • Sound output
E
SKIB3609E
19
Ground Battery power supply Input — Battery voltage
(G) F
21 Input/
— AV communication low — —
(LG) output
22 Input/ G
— AV communication high — —
(SB) output
23 Input/
(LG) output H
24 Input/
(SB) output
25 Input/ I
— CAN low — —
(P) output
26 Input/
— CAN high — —
(L) output J
NOTE:
The maximum voltage varies de-
pending on the specification
K
(destination unit).
Ignition switch ON
28 Vehicle speed signal (8-
Ground Input • When vehicle speed is approx. 40
(BG) pulse)
km/h (25 MPH) L
M
JSNIA0012GB
Selector lever in R (reverse) Battery voltage

30 —
Reverse signal Input Selector lever in any position other
(G) 0V AV
than R (reverse)
31
Ground Ignition power supply Input Ignition switch ON Battery voltage
(BG)
O
32
— MR output Input — —
(P)
34 Hands-free voice recogni-
(LG)
—
tion output
Output — — P
381 — Sound signal shield — — —

(Shield)

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
391 401 Sound signal Input Sound input into the microphone
(W) (B)
SKIB3609E
46
48
(B)1 Microphone signal Input While speaking into the microphone
(Shield)
(W)2
SKIB3609E
2
47 — Microphone power supply — — 5.0 V
(B)
49 51 AUX in jack sound signal Ignition switch ON

Input
(W) (B) LH • Sound output
SKIB3609E

Input
(R) (B) RH • Sound output
SKIB3609E
52
— Aux in jack shield — — —
(Shield)
57
Ground Camera power supply Output Ignition switch ON 6.2 V
(R)
59
58 Ignition switch ON
(B)3 Camera image signal Input
(B) • Image is displayed.
(W)4
SKIB0827E
60
— Camera shield — — —
(Shield)
61
— V BUS signal — — —
(B)
63
— USB D- signal — — —
(G)

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
64 B
— USB D+ signal — — —
(W)
65
— USB ground — — —
(R) C
66
— USB shield — — —
(Shield)
67 AV control unit ON D
Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Output Battery voltage
(B) • FM-AM selected
68
— AM-FM main Input — —
(B) E
69
— AM-FM ground — — —
(Shield)
70
— FM sub Input — — F
(B)
71
— FM sub ground — — —
(Shield)
G
Ignition switch ON
72 Satellite radio antenna
Ground Input • Satellite antenna connector discon- 5.0 V
(B) signal
nected
H
— — — —
(Shield) shield
Ignition switch ON
74
Ground GPS antenna signal Input • GPS antenna connector discon- 5.0 V
I
(B)
nected
75
— GPS antenna shield — — — J
(Shield)
76
(B)
78 K
(G)
79
(W) L
80
(R)
81 M
(Shield)
821 — V BUS signal — — —

(B) AV
1
84 — USB D- signal — — —
(G)
O
851 — USB D+ signal — — —
(W)
861 — USB ground — — — P

(R)
871 — USB shield — — —

(Shield)
1: With telematics
2: Without telematics
3
: With around view monitor

AV CONTROL UNIT
4
: With rear view monitor
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000014275731
If multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check them one by one depending on the following DTC inspec-
tion priority chart.
Priority Detected items (DTC)

1 U12AA: CONFIGURATION ERROR
• U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
2
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT(CAN)
• B1F01: ENG SPEED SIG ERROR
• B1F02: DOOR STATUS SIG ERROR
3
• U124E: AMP CONN
• U1267: METER CONN
• U121F: DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT
4 • U1300: AV COMM CIRCUIT
• U1310: CONTROL UNIT(AV)
• B1F0B: ANC MIC1 CIRC OPEN
• B1F0C: ANC MIC1 CIRC SHORT
• B1F0D: ANC MIC1 CIRC SHORT-BAT
• B1F0E: ANC MIC1 CIRC SHORT-GND
• B1F10: ANC MIC2 CIRC OPEN
• B1F11: ANC MIC2 CIRC SHORT
• B1F12: ANC MIC2 CIRC SHORT-BAT
• B1F13: ANC MIC2 CIRC SHORT-GND
• B1F15: ANC MIC3 CIRC OPEN
• B1F16: ANC MIC3 CIRC SHORT
• B1F17: ANC MIC3 CIRC SHORT-BAT
• B1F18: ANC MIC3 CIRC SHORT-GND
• U1231: AMP TEMP
• U1232: ST ANGLE SEN CALIB
• U1244: GPS ANTENNA CONN
5
• U1258: XM ANTENNA CONN
• U1263: USB OVERCURRENT
• U1266: TCU CONN
• U12B7: USB CONN
• U12BA: MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH CONN
• U12BE: RADIO ANTENNA CONN
• U1601: FL-DOOR WOOFER
• U1609: FR-DOOR WOOFER
• U1626: F-INST L-SQUAWK
• U162A: F-INST C-SQUAWK
• U162E: F-INST R-SQUAWK
• U170A: RL-DOOR SQUAWK
• U1712: RR-DOOR SQUAWK
• U1721: R-PSHELF L-WOOFER
• U1729: R-PSHELF R-WOOFER
DTC Index INFOID:0000000014275732
DTC Display item Refer to

B1F01 ENG SPEED SIG ERROR AV-66, "DTC Description"
B1F02 DOOR STATUS SIG ERROR AV-68, "DTC Description"
B1F0B ANC MIC1 CIRC OPEN
B1F0C ANC MIC1 CIRC SHORT
AV-70, "DTC Description"
B1F0D ANC MIC1 CIRC SHORT-BAT
B1F0E ANC MIC1 CIRC SHORT-GND

AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Display item Refer to
A
B1F10 ANC MIC2 CIRC OPEN
B1F11 ANC MIC2 CIRC SHORT
B1F12 ANC MIC2 CIRC SHORT-BAT B
B1F13 ANC MIC2 CIRC SHORT-GND
B1F15 ANC MIC3 CIRC OPEN
B1F16 ANC MIC3 CIRC SHORT C
B1F17 ANC MIC3 CIRC SHORT-BAT
B1F18 ANC MIC3 CIRC SHORT-GND
D
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AV-79, "DTC Description"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT(CAN) AV-81, "DTC Description"
U121F DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT AV-83, "DTC Description" E
U1231 AMP TEMP AV-84, "DTC Description"
U1232 ST ANGLE SEN CALIB AV-85, "DTC Description"
F
U1244 GPS ANTENNA CONN AV-86, "DTC Description"
U124E AMP CONN AV-87, "DTC Description"
U1258 XM ANTENNA CONN AV-89, "DTC Description" G
U1263 USB OVERCURRENT AV-91, "DTC Description"
U1266 TCU CONN AV-92, "DTC Description"
H
U1267 METER CONN AV-94, "DTC Description"
U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR AV-96, "DTC Description"
U12B7 USB CONN AV-97, "DTC Description" I
U12BA MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH CONN AV-98, "DTC Description"
U12BE RADIO ANTENNA CONN AV-100, "DTC Description"
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT AV-102, "DTC Description"
J
U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV) AV-105, "DTC Description"

U1601 FL-DOOR WOOFER
AV-106, "DTC Description" K
U1609 FR-DOOR WOOFER
U1626 F-INST L-SQUAWK AV-109, "DTC Description"
U162A F-INST C-SQUAWK AV-112, "DTC Description" L
U162E F-INST R-SQUAWK AV-109, "DTC Description"
U170A RL-DOOR SQUAWK
AV-114, "DTC Description" M
U1712 RR-DOOR SQUAWK
U1721 R-PSHELF L-WOOFER
U1729 R-PSHELF R-WOOFER AV

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA4128ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
1 2 Sound signal rear subwoofer Ignition switch ON

Output
(W) (G) RH • Sound output
SKIB3609E
3 4 Sound signal front door Ignition switch ON

Output
(P) (BG) speaker RH • Sound output
SKIB3609E
5 6 Sound signal rear subwoofer Ignition switch ON

Output
(W) (G) LH • Sound output
SKIB3609E
7
— Ground — Ignition switch ON 0V
(GR)
10 7
Battery power supply — Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage
(SB) (GR)
11 7
Battery power supply — Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage
(G) (GR)

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
12 B
(GR)

Output
(P) (W) speaker LH • Sound output
D
SKIB3609E
16 29 Ignition switch ON F
Sound signal tweeter LH Output
(P) (R) • Sound output
SKIB3609E
G
H
Sound signal center speaker Output
(P) (R) • Sound output
I
SKIB3609E

Output
(W) (BG) tweeter RH • Sound output K
SKIB3609E
L
M
22 33 Sound signal rear door Ignition switch ON
Output
(LG) (Y) speaker LH • Sound output
AV
SKIB3609E
23 34 Sound signal rear door Ignition switch ON

Output
(G) (W) speaker RH • Sound output
P
SKIB3609E

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

Output
(G) (R) tweeter LH • Sound output
SKIB3609E
Sound signal tweeter RH Output
(G) (W) • Sound output
SKIB3609E
51 Input/
(W) Output
52 Input/
(W) Output
53 7
Ignition power supply — Ignition switch ON or ACC Battery voltage
(P) (GR)
60 40 Front right microphone sig- Ignition switch ON

Input
(Y) (L) nal • When interior sound is input
SKIB3609E
Voice guidance signal Input
SKIB3609E
Sound signal LH Input
(G) (R) • Sound input
SKIB3609E
Sound signal RH Input
(B) (W) • Sound input
SKIB3609E

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
68 48 Ignition switch ON C
Rear microphone signal Input
(LG) (B) • When interior sound is input
SKIB3609E D
E
Front left microphone signal Input
(R) (G) • When interior sound is input
F
SKIB3609E
71 Input/
— AV communication high — — G
(B) Output
72 Input/
(B) Output
H
Ignition switch ON
0V
73 7 • When any door is open
Step lamp signal Input
(W) (GR) Ignition switch ON
12.0 V I
• When all doors are closed
J
75 7 Engine running
Engine speed signal Input
(BG) (GR) • Idle speed
K
JMBIA0076GB
76 Input/
(Shield)
— AV communication shield
Output
— — L
AV

MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE)]
WIRING DIAGRAM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000014275734
ABNWA3248GB

AV
ABNWA3258GB

ABNWA3259GB

AV
AANWA1385GB

ABNWA3249GB

AV
ABNIA9669GB

ABNIA9670GB

AV
ABNIA9671GB

ABNIA9672GB

AV
ABNIA9673GB

ABNIA9674GB

AV
ABNIA9675GB

ABNIA9676GB

AV
ABNIA9677GB

ABNIA9678GB

AV
ABNIA9679GB

ABNIA9680GB

AV
ABNIA9681GB

ABNIA9682GB

AV
ABNIA9683GB

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE)]
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow INFOID:0000000014275735
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JSNIA4482GB
• Reference 1: Refer to AV-28, "CONSULT Function".

• Reference 2: Refer to AV-33, "DTC Index".
• Reference 3: Refer to AV-151, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items:
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurred symptom a malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Inspection End.
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT
1. Connect CONSULT and perform a "Self Diagnostic Result" for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-28, "CONSULT
Function". A
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed.
2. When DTC is detected, follow the instructions below:
B
- Record DTC and Freeze Frame Data (FFD).
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
C
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
1. Check the DTC indicated in the “Self Diagnostic Result”. D
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-33, "DTC Index".
>> GO TO 5. E
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-151, "Symptom F
Table".
>> GO TO 5. G
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
2. Perform a "Self Diagnostic Result" for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT. H
NOTE:
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC
has been indicated in the “Self Diagnosic Result”. I
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
Does the symptom occur?
YES >> GO TO 1. J
AV

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT
BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing AV control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before
replacement.
NOTE:
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” after
replacing AV control unit.
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
When replacing AV control unit, always perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with CONSULT.
• Complete the procedure of “WRITE CONFIGURATION” in order.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• If you set incorrect “WRITE CONFIGURATION”, incidents might occur.
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000014275737
1.WRITE DOWN THE REGISTRATION CODE FROM THE NEW / REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT
On the replacement AV control unit’s label, locate and write down the
registration code (1).
>> GO TO 2.
AWNIA4080ZZ
2.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)

CONSULT Configuration
Perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle specification. Refer to AV-63, "Descrip-
tion".
NOTE:
>> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-164, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT’S CONFIGURATION.
1. Place the radio into Self Diagnostic mode. Refer to AV-26, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
2. Select “Confirmation/Adjustment”.
3. Select “Version Information”.
4. If the “ITM Configuration Part Number” matches the “ITM Part Number”, GO TO 5.
5. If the “ITM Configuration Part Number” does not match the “ITM Part Number”, perform the “Factory Con-
figuration Data Initialization” from the “Reset Settings” menu under “Confirmation/Adjustment” to clear the
factory configuration data.
>> GO TO 5.

5.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) A

Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file” or “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” to write
vehicle specification. Refer to AV-63, "Work Procedure". B
>> GO TO 6.
6.CLEAR DTC’S AND CHECK AV SYSTEM OPERATION. C
1. Perform a “ Self Diagnostic Result” for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT.
2. Clear any DTC’s in Multi AV.
3. Verify operation of Multi AV system. D
>> GO TO 7.
E
7.REGISTER THE REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT.
Perform AV control unit registration. Refer to AV-65, "Work Procedure".
F
>> Work End.
AV

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing AV control
unit.
Configuration has three functions as follows.
Function Description
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit.
Before Replace ECU
Read / Write Configuration • Saves the read vehicle configuration.
After Replace ECU Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.
Manual Configuration Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
NOTE:
Manual setting item: Items which need selection by vehicle specifications
Automatic setting item: Items which are written in automatically (Setting cannot be changed)
For some models and specifications, the automatic setting item may not be displayed.
CAUTION:
When replacing AV control unit, always perform “Re/programming, Configuration” with CONSULT. If
not performed, AV control unit will not operate normally.
• Complete the procedure of “Read / Write Configuration” in order.
• Never perform “Read / Write Configuration” except for new AV control unit.
• If you set incorrect “Read / Write Configuration”, the AV control unit may not operate properly.
1.WRITING MODE SELECTION

Select “Re/programming, Configuration” of MULTI AV.
When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.

When writing manually>>GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM “AFTER REPLACE ECU” OF “READ / WRITE CONFIGURATION”
Perform “After Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration”.
>> WORK END

3.PERFORM “MANUAL CONFIGURATION”
1. Select “Manual Configuration”.
2. Identify the correct model and configuration list. Refer to AV-64, "Configuration list".
3. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item.
CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally
if the setting is not correct.
NOTE:
If items are not displayed, touch “Next”. Refer to AV-64, "Configuration list" for written items and setting
value.
4. Touch “Next”.
5. Touch “OK”.
CAUTION:
Make sure to select “OK” even if the indicated configuration of brand new AV control unit is the
same as the desired configuration. If “OK” is not selected, configuration will not be complete.
6. Check that the configuration has been successfully written and touch “End”.

>> GO TO 4. A
4.OPERATION CHECK
Confirm that the AV control unit operates normally. B
>> Work End.

C
Configuration list INFOID:0000000014275740
CAUTION:
• Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally if D
the setting is not correct.
• The “setting value” of this vehicle is as follows: Never select any other value than the setting value
shown below. (If there is only 1 item in “setting value” that means that item is the only choice for this E
certain vehicle.)
SETTING ITEM
NOTE F
Items Setting value
Without around view monitor system or rear view monitor sys-
NONE/AVM
tem
CAMERA SYSTEM G
REAR With rear view monitor system
AVM With around view monitor system
BASE Without BOSE audio system H
SOUND SYSTEM
BOSE With BOSE audio system
WITH With telematics system
TELEMATICS I
WITHOUT Without telematics system
FRONT&REAR With front and rear sonar
SONAR TYPE
NONE Without front and rear sonar J
AV

REGISTRATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
AFTER REPLACEMENT
If the AV control unit is replaced with a new AV control unit, the new AV control unit must be registered using
the registration code.
CAUTION:
If the new AV control unit registration code is not registered, the “APPS” mode will not function.
1.RECORD REGISTRATION CODE FOR REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT

1. Refer to the replacement AV control unit’s label located on the top of the AV control unit.
2. Locate the registration code (1) on the AV control unit’s label.
AWNIA4080ZZ
3. Record the registration code.
>> GO TO 2.
2.REGISTER REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT
Register the replacement AV control unit by contacting NISSAN Owner Services. Refer to TSB.
>> GO TO 3.
3.OPERATION CHECK
Verify that the AV control unit “APPS” function operates normally.
>> Work End.

B1F01 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE)]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000014275743
B
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

C
CONSULT screen terms
DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
D
ENG SPEED SIG ERROR Signal (terminal) –
B1F01
(Engine speed signal error) Threshold –
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connectors (Engine speed signal circuit) F
• ECM
FAIL-SAFE G
—
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
H
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. I
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Start engine and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC. J
Is DTC B1F01 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-66, "Diagnosis Procedure".
K
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000014275744
L
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-39, "Wiring Diagram". M
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT OF ECM AV

With CONSULT
Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Are any DTCs displayed? O
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for detected DTC. Refer to EC-106, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN BOSE SPEAKER AMP. AND ECM P
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and ECM harness connector E10.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and ECM connector E10.

BOSE speaker amp. ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
B149 75 E10 126 Yes
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN BOSE SPEAKER AMP. AND GROUND
Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and ground.
BOSE speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B149 75 — No
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN BOSE SPEAKER AMP. AND GROUND
Check the voltage between BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and ground.
BOSE speaker amp. Voltage

Ground
Connector Terminal (Approx.)
B149 75 (—) 0V
YES >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation".

B1F02 DOOR STATUS SIGNAL
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

(Trouble diagnosis content) C
DOOR STATUS SIG ERROR Signal (terminal) –

B1F02
(Door status signal error) Threshold – D
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• Harness or connectors (Door signal circuit)
• BCM F
FAIL-SAFE
—
G
With CONSULT H
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Open the driver's door and wait at least 2 seconds or more.
6. Check DTC.
J
Is DTC B1F02 detected?
K
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-39, "Wiring Diagram".

M
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT OF BCM

With CONSULT AV
Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for detected DTC. Refer to BCS-52, "DTC Index". O
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN BOSE SPEAKER AMP. AND BCM
P
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and BCM connector M21.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and BCM connector M21.

BOSE speaker amp. BCM

Continuity
B149 73 M21 21 Yes
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN BOSE SPEAKER AMP. AND GROUND
BOSE speaker mp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B149 73 — No
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN BOSE SPEAKER AMP. AND GROUND
Check the voltage between BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and ground.

Ground
B149 73 (—) 0V

B1F0B, B1F0C, B1F0D, B1F0E ANC MIC1 CIRCUIT
A

ANC MIC1 CIRC OPEN • MIC 1 + (DR) (terminal 69)

Signal (terminal)
B1F0B (Active noise cancellation OPEN • MIC 1 – (DR) (terminal 49) D
microphone1 circuit open) Threshold –
E
ANC MIC1 CIRC SHORT • MIC 1 + (DR) (terminal 69)

Signal (terminal)
B1F0C (Active noise cancellation SHORT • MIC 1 – (DR) (terminal 49)
microphone1 circuit short) F
Threshold –
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON. G
ANC MIC1 CIRC SHORT-BAT • MIC 1 + (DR) (terminal 69)
(Active noise cancellation Signal (terminal)
B1F0D VB-SHOR • MIC 1 – (DR) (terminal 49)
microphone1 circuit short-bat-
tery) Threshold – H
ANC MIC1 CIRC SHORT-GND I
• MIC 1 + (DR) (terminal 69)
(Active noise cancellation GND- Signal (terminal)
B1F0E • MIC 1 – (DR) (terminal 49)
microphone1 circuit short- SHORT
ground) Threshold –
J
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connectors K
- MIC 1 + (DR) open, short, short to ground or short to voltage
- MIC 1 – (DR) open, short, short to ground or short to voltage
• Front left microphone (Active Noise Control) L
• Bose speaker amp.
FAIL-SAFE
— M
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AV
With CONSULT
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds. O
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
5. Check DTC.
P
Is DTC B1F0B, B1F0C, B1F0D or B1F0E detected?

1.CHECK DETECTED DTC

Refer to AV-70, "DTC Description".
Was DTC B1F0B detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> If DTC B1F0C was detected, GO TO 3.
NO-2 >> If DTC B1F0D was detected, GO TO 4.
NO-1 >> If DTC B1F0E was detected, GO TO 5.
2.CHECK FRONT LEFT MICROPHONE (ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and front left microphone (Active Noise Control) connec-
tor.
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and front left microphone (Active Nose
Control) connector R20.
BOSE speaker amp. Front left microphone (Active Noise Control)

Continuity
69 1
B149 R20 Yes
49 2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
3.CHECK FRONT LEFT MICROPHONE (ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and front left microphone (Active Nose Control) connec-
tor.
3. Check continuity between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector B149.
Bose speaker amp. connector B149

Continuity
Terminal Terminal
69 49 No
YES >> GO TO 6.
4.CHECK FRONT LEFT MICROPHONE (ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO VOLT-
AGE
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and front left microphone (Active Nose Control) connec-
tor.
4. Check voltage between BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and ground.

Ground
69
B149 (—) 0V
49

YES >> GO TO 6. A
5.CHECK FRONT LEFT MICROPHONE (ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
B
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and front left microphone (Active Noise Control) connec-
tor.
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and ground. C
BOSE speaker amp.

Ground Continuity D
Connector Terminal
69
B149 — No
49 E
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. F
6.CHECK FRONT LEFT MICROPHONE (ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL) SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
2. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and front left microphone (Active Nose Control) connector.
4. Check signal between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector B149.
H
(+) (−) Condition Reference value
I
Terminal Terminal
69 49 Input interior sound

K
SKIB3609E
Is the inspection result normal? L

NO >> Replace front left microphone (Active Noise Control). Refer to AV-181, "Removal and Installation -
Front". M
AV

B1F10, B1F11, B1F12, B1F13 ANC MIC2 CIRCUIT
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

ANC MIC2 CIRC OPEN • MIC 2 + (AS) (terminal 60)

Signal (terminal)
B1F10 (Active noise cancellation OPEN • MIC 2 – (AS) (terminal 40)
ANC MIC2 CIRC SHORT • MIC 2 + (AS) (terminal 60)

Signal (terminal)
B1F11 (Active noise cancellation SHORT • MIC 2 – (AS) (terminal 40)
microphone2 circuit short) Threshold –
ANC MIC2 CIRC SHORT-BAT • MIC 2 + (AS) (terminal 60)
B1F12 VB-SHOR • MIC 2 – (AS) (terminal 40)
tery) Threshold –
ANC MIC2 CIRC SHORT-GND • MIC 2 + (AS) (terminal 60)
B1F13 • MIC 2 – (AS) (terminal 40)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connectors
- MIC 2 + (AS) open, short, short to ground or short to voltage
- MIC 2 – (AS) open, short, short to ground or short to voltage
• Front right microphone (Active Noise Control)
FAIL-SAFE
—
With CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC B1F10, B1F11, B1F12 or B1F13 detected?


B

Refer to AV-73, "DTC Description". C
Was DTC B1F10 detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> If DTC B1F11 was detected, GO TO 3. D
NO-2 >> If DTC B1F12 was detected, GO TO 4.
2.CHECK FRONT RIGHT MICROPHONE (ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN E

2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and front right microphone (Active Noise Control) con-
nector. F
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and front right microphone (Active Nose
Control) connector R19.
G
BOSE speaker amp. Front right microphone (Active Noise Control)
Continuity
H
60 1
B149 R19 Yes
40 2
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 6.
3.CHECK FRONT RIGHT MICROPHONE (ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT J

2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and front right microphone (Active Nose Control) con-
nector. K

L
Continuity
Terminal Terminal
60 40 No
M
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. AV
4.CHECK FRONT RIGHT MICROPHONE (ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO VOLT-
AGE
O
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and front right microphone (Active Nose Control) con-
nector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. P

Ground
60
B149 (—) 0V
40

YES >> GO TO 6.
5.CHECK FRONT RIGHT MICROPHONE (ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and front right microphone (Active Noise Control) con-
nector.
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and ground.
BOSE speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
60
B149 — No
40
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK FRONT RIGHT MICROPHONE (ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL) SIGNAL
2. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and front right microphone (Active Nose Control) connec-
tor.

Terminal Terminal
SKIB3609E

NO >> Replace front right microphone (Active Noise Control). Refer to AV-181, "Removal and Installation
- Front".

A

ANC MIC3 CIRC OPEN • MIC 3 + (RR) (terminal 68)

Signal (terminal)
B1F15 (Active noise cancellation OPEN • MIC 3 – (RR) (terminal 48) D
E
ANC MIC3 CIRC SHORT • MIC 3 + (RR) (terminal 68)

Signal (terminal)
B1F16 (Active noise cancellation SHORT • MIC 3 – (RR) (terminal 48)
microphone3 circuit short) F
Threshold –
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON. G
ANC MIC3 CIRC SHORT-BAT • MIC 3 + (RR) (terminal 68)
B1F17 VB-SHOR • MIC 3 – (RR) (terminal 48)
tery) Threshold – H
ANC MIC3 CIRC SHORT-GND I
• MIC 3 + (RR) (terminal 68)
B1F18 • MIC 3 – (RR) (terminal 48)
J
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connectors K
- MIC 3 + (RR) open, short, short to ground or short to voltage
- MIC 3 – (RR) open, short, short to ground or short to voltage
• Rear microphone (Active Noise Control) L
FAIL-SAFE
— M
With CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
P
Is DTC B1F15, B1F16, B1F17 or B1F18 detected?


Refer to AV-76, "DTC Description".
Was DTC B1F15 detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR MICROPHONE (ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL) CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and rear microphone (Active Noise Control) connector.
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and rear microphone (Active Nose Con-
trol) connector R23.
BOSE speaker amp. Rear microphone (Active Noise Control)

Continuity
68 1
B149 R23 Yes
48 2
YES >> GO TO 6.
3.CHECK REAR MICROPHONE (ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and rear microphone (Active Nose Control) connector.

Continuity
Terminal Terminal
68 48 No
YES >> GO TO 6.
4.CHECK REAR MICROPHONE (ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and rear microphone (Active Nose Control) connector.

Ground
68
B149 (—) 0V
48
YES >> GO TO 6.

5.CHECK REAR MICROPHONE (ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL) CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND A
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and rear microphone (Active Noise Control) connector.
B
BOSE speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal C
68
B149 — No
48
D
YES >> GO TO 6.
E
6.CHECK REAR MICROPHONE (ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL) SIGNAL
2. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and rear microphone (Active Nose Control) connector. F
G
Terminal Terminal H
I
J
SKIB3609E

K
NO >> Replace rear microphone (Active Noise Control). Refer to AV-181, "Removal and Installation -
Rear".
L
AV

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communica-
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CAN COMM CIRCUIT Signal (terminal) –

U1000
(CAN COMM CIRCUIT) Threshold –
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CAN communication system
FAIL-SAFE
—
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC U1000 is displayed with DTC U1310, first perform the confirmation procedure (trouble diagnosis) for
DTC U1310.
Is DTC U1310 detected?
YES >> Refer to AV-105, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
CONSULT
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”.
5. Check DTC.
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.

6. Check DTC. A
Is DTC U1000 detected again?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagno-
sis Flow Chart". B
AV

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
DESCRIPTION
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONTROL UNIT (CAN) Signal (terminal) -

U1010
[Control unit (CAN)] Threshold -
POSSIBLE CAUSE
FAIL-SAFE
—
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
5. Check DTC.

YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-164, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Inspection End. A
AV

U121F AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT Signal (terminal) —

U121F
(Display Control Unit) Threshold AV control unit internal malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
With CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U121F detected?
1.CHECK CONNECTION STATUS OF AV CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR

Check the AV control unit connectors for proper connection, damage and disconnected or loose terminals.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR SD CARD POOR CONNECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait 30 seconds or more.
2. Remove and re-insert the SD card.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON and wait for 30 seconds or more.
4. Check self-diagnosis results of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.

U1231 AMP TEMP
U1231 AMP TEMP
A

AMP TEMP Signal (terminal) –

U1231
(Amp temperature) Threshold – D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• BOSE amp. temperature is high
• BOSE amp.
FAIL-SAFE F
—
G
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”. I
5. Check DTC.
YES >> Proceed to AV-84, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000014275754 K
1.CHECK AROUND BOSE AMP.

L
Check whether there is any factor which causes a temperature rise near BOSE amp.
Was there any factor?
YES >> GO TO 2.
M
NO >> Remove factor.
CONSULT AV
2. Erase DTC.
6. Check DTC.
P
YES >> Replace BOSE amp. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation".

U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

ST ANGLE SEN CALIB Signal (terminal) –

U1232
(Steering angle sensor calibration) Threshold –
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Neutral position adjustment of the steering angle sensor is incomplete
• Steering angle sensor
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
1.ADJUST NEUTRAL POSITION OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

Adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position. Refer to BRC-67, "Work Procedure" (VDC/TCS/ABS) or
BRC-253, "Work Procedure" (FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING).
NOTE:
When U1232 is detected, adjust the predictive course line center position of the steering angle sensor.
>> GO TO 2.
CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
YES >> Replace steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-177, "Removal and Installation" (VDC/TCS/ABS) or
BRC-379, "Removal and Installation" (FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING).

U1244 GPS ANTENNA CONN
A

GPS ANTENNA CONN Signal (terminal) –

U1244
(GPS antenna connection error) Threshold – D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• GPS antenna is not connected
• GPS antenna
FAIL-SAFE F
—
G
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds. H
5. Check DTC. I
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". J
K
1.CHECK GPS ANTENNA HARNESS CONNECTOR
2. Visually check GPS antenna connection. L
YES >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-179, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair connection of GPS antenna. M
AV

U124E AMP CONN
U124E AMP CONN
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

AMP CONN Signal (terminal) –

U124E
(Amp connection error) Threshold –
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more.
NOTE:
DTC U124E is displayed with DTC U1300.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• AV communication circuit is open
FAIL-SAFE
—
With CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U124E detected?
1.CHECK BOSE SPEAKER AMP. POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check BOSE speaker amp. power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-121, "BOSE SPEAKER AMP : Diag-
nosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M163 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B149.
3. Check the continuity between AV control unit connector M163 and BOSE speaker amp. connector B149.

U124E AMP CONN
AV control unit BOSE speaker amp. A

Continuity
21 52
B
22 72
M163 B149 Yes
23 51
24 71 C
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. D
AV

U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC No. (Trouble diagnosis content) DTC detection condition

Satellite radio antenna circuit is short to
Signal (terminal)
ground (terminal 72)
1
Threshold
ground
XM ANTENNA CONN
U1258 (Satellite radio antenna connection Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
error) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Satellite antenna signal is open (terminal
Signal (terminal)
2 72)
Threshold Satellite radio antenna circuit is open
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Satellite radio antenna is disconnected
• Harness or connector (Satellite radio antenna circuit is open or short)
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
1.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA CONNECTOR

2. Visually inspect the satellite radio antenna and antenna feeder.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE

2. Check the voltage between AV control unit connector M166 and ground.
A
AV control unit Voltage
Ground
B
M166 72 (—) 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3. C
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-164, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M166 and satellite antenna connector.
3. Check the continuity between AV control unit connector M166 and satellite antenna connector R206.
E
AV control unit Satellite antenna
Continuity
F
M166 72 R206 1 Yes
4. Check the continuity between AV control unit connector M166 and ground.
G
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M166 72 — No
H

YES >> Replace satellite radio antenna. Refer to AV-177, "Removal and Installation". I
AV

U1263 USB
U1263 USB
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

USB OVERCURRENT Signal (terminal) –
U1263 (Overcurrent in USB harness is de-
tected) Threshold –
POSSIBLE CAUSE
USB Harness or connector
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1263 displayed?
1.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESSES

Visually inspect USB interface harnesses. Refer to AV-168, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace USB interface. Refer to AV-168, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS CIRCUITS
Check USB interface harness circuits. Refer to AV-148, "Diagnosis Procedure".

U1266 TCU
U1266 TCU
A

TCU CONN Signal (terminal) –

U1266
(Error in USB harness is detected) Threshold – D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
FAIL-SAFE
— F

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G
CONSULT
5. Check DTC. I

L
1.CHECK TCU USB HARNESS

Visually inspect TCU USB harness. M
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace TCU USB harness. AV
2.CHECK CONTINUITY OF TCU USB HARNESS
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. O
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M158 and TCU connector M193.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M158 and TCU connector M193.
P

U1266 TCU
AV control unit TCU

Continuity
82 41
84 43
M354 85 M193 44 Yes
86 45
87 46
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M158 and ground.
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
82
M158 — No
85

U1267 METER CONN
U1267 METER CONN
A

METER CONN AV communication circuits (terminals 23

Signal (terminal)
U1267 (Combination meter connection er- and 24) D
ror) Threshold –
E
NOTE:
DTC U1267 is displayed with DTC U1300.
POSSIBLE CAUSE F
• Combination meter
FAIL-SAFE G
—
H
CONSULT
J
5. Check DTC.
K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000014275768 L
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT AV

Check combination meter power supply and ground circuit. Refer to MWI-59, "COMBINATION METER : Diag-
nosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal? O
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT P
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M163 and combination meter connector M23.
3. Check the continuity between AV control unit connector M163 and combination meter connector M23.

U1267 METER CONN
AV control unit Combination meter

Continuity
23 49
M163 M23 Yes
24 50
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-77, "Removal and Installation".

U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR
A

CONFIGURATION ERROR Signal (terminal) –

U12AA
(AV control unit configuration) Threshold – D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• Configuration procedure not performed
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE F
—
G
CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AA detected?
1.PERFORM CONFIGURATION
L
Perform configuration procedure. Refer to AV-63, "Work Procedure".
Was configuration procedure successful?
YES >> Inspection End.
M
AV

U12B7 USB CONN
U12B7 USB CONN
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

USB CONN Signal (terminal) –

U12B7
(USB connection error) Threshold –
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• AV control unit
• USB harness is not connected
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
4. Connect audio apparatuses, etc., to USB port.
6. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12B7 detected?
1.CHECK DTC (1)

CONSULT
1. Remove connected audio apparatus from USB port.
4. Erase DTC.
7. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “MULTI AV”.
Is any DTC detected?
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC (2)
1. Connect audio apparatus to USB port again.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”.
YES >> Abnormality of audio apparatus connected to USB port.

U12BA MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH CONN
A

MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
CONN Signal (terminal) –
U12BA
(Multifunction switch connection Threshold – D
error)
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• Multifunction switch
• Multifunction switch is not connected
FAIL-SAFE F
—
G
With CONSULT
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT. I
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12BA detected?
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-39, "Wiring Diagram". L
1.CHECK MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH POWER AND GROUND M

Check the multifunction switch power and ground circuits. Refer to AV-122, "MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH :
Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal? AV
YES >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AV COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS O

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M163, data link connector, combination meter connector M23, multi-
P
function switch connector and Bose speaker amp. connector B149.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M162 and multifunction switch connector M259.

AV control unit Multifunction switch

Continuity
23 4
M162 M259 Yes
24 3
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
23
M162 — No
24
YES >> Replace multifunction switch. Refer to AV-182, "Removal and Installation".

U12BE RADIO ANTENNA CONN
A

DTC No. (Trouble diagnosis content) DTC detection condition C

Radio antenna signal is shorted to ground D
Signal (terminal)
1 (terminal 68)
Threshold –
RADIO ANTENNA CONN Diagnosis delay time 2 seconds or more E

U12BE
(Radio antenna connection error) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Radio antenna signal is open (terminal
Signal (terminal) F
2 68)
Threshold –
G
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Radio antenna is not connected
• Harness or connector (Radio antenna circuit is open or shorted) H
FAIL-SAFE
—
I
J
CONSULT
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more. K
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12BE detected? L
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End. M
AV
O
1.CHECK WINDOW ANTENNA HARNESS CONNECTOR
2. Visually inspect the radio antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-17, "Antennas, Antenna Amp. and P
Antenna Feeder".
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M165 68 Ground 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ANTENNA HARNESS CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M165 and antenna amp. connector.
2. Check the continuity between AV control unit connector M165 and antenna amp. connector R202.
AV control unit Antenna amp. Continuity

M165 68 R202 2 Yes
3. Check the continuity AV control unit connector M165 and ground.
AV control unit Continuity

Connector Terminal
M165 68 Ground No
YES >> Replace antenna. Refer to GW-27, "Removal and Installation".

U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
A


AV communication circuits are short to D
Signal (terminal)
1 ground (terminals 21, 22, 23, and 24)
Threshold –
AV COMM CIRCUIT Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more E

U1300
(AV comm circuit error) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
AV communication circuits are open (ter-
Signal (terminal) F
2 minals 21, 22, 23, and 24)
Threshold –
G
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector (AV comm circuits are open or short)
FAIL SAFE H
—
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE I
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”. K
5. Check DTC.
YES >> Proceed to AV-102, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000014275778 M
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-39, "Wiring Diagram". AV
1.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION LOW CIRCUIT CONTINUITY O

function switch connector and Bose speaker amp. connector B149. P
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M162 and data link connector M22.
AV control unit Data link

Continuity
M162 23 M22 3 Yes
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M162 and combination meter connector M23.


Continuity
M162 23 M23 49 Yes

Continuity
M162 23 M259 4 Yes
6. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M162 and Bose speaker amp. connector B149.
AV control unit Bose speaker amp.

Continuity
23 51 Yes
M162 B149
21 52
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
23
M162 — No
21
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION HIGH CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

Continuity
M162 24 M22 11 Yes

Continuity
M162 24 M23 50 Yes

Continuity
M162 24 M259 3 Yes
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M162 and Bose speaker amp. connector B149.
AV control unit Bose speaker amp.

Continuity
24 71 Yes
M162 B149
22 72

A
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B
24
M162 — No
22
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> Replace the AV control unit. Refer to AV-164, "Removal and Installation".
D
AV

U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONTROL UNIT (AV) Signal (terminal) –

U1310
(AV control unit initialization error) Threshold –
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AV control unit
FAIL SAFE
—
CONSULT
5. Check DTC.

U1601, U1609 DOOR WOOFER
A

Sound signal between BOSE speaker
Signal (terminal) amp. and front door speaker LH (termi- D
OPEN nals 8 and 13)
Threshold –
Signal (terminal) amp. and front door speaker LH (termi- F
SHORT nals 8 and 13)
Threshold –
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more G
FL-DOOR WOOFER
U1601
(Front door speaker LH) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
H
GND- Signal (terminal) amp. and front door speaker LH (termi-
Threshold –
I
Sound signal between BOSE speaker J
Signal (terminal) amp. and front door speaker LH (termi-
VB-SHOR nals 8 and 13)
Threshold –
K
AV

Signal (terminal) amp. and front door speaker RH (termi-
OPEN nals 3 and 4)
Threshold –
SHORT nals 3 and 4)
Threshold –
FR-DOOR WOOFER Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

U1609
(Front door speaker RH) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
GND- Signal (terminal) amp. and front door speaker RH (termi-
SHORT nals 3 and 4)
Threshold –
Threshold –
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Front door speaker LH circuits
• Front door speaker LH
• Front door speaker RH circuits
• Front door speaker RH
FAIL-SAFE
—
With CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1601 or U1609 detected?

1.CHECK SOUND SIGNAL CIRCUITS FOR OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND A

2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B110 and suspect front door speaker connector.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B110 and suspect front door speaker con-
B
nector.
BOSE speaker amp. Front door speaker

Continuity C
13 1
D3 (LH)
8 2 D
B110 Yes
3 1
D103 (RH)
4 2
E
4. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B110 and ground.
BOSE speaker amp. F

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
13
8 G
B110 — No
3
4
H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. I
2.CHECK SOUND SIGNAL CIRCUITS FOR SHORT
Check the continuity between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector B110 for the suspect front door
speaker. J
BOSE speaker amp.

Front door speaker Continuity K
Connector Terminal
13 8 LH
B110 No
3 4 RH L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. M
3.CHECK SOUND SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch ON. AV
2. Check the voltage between BOSE amp. connector B110 and ground for the suspect front door speaker.
BOSE speaker amp. O

Ground Front door speaker Voltage
Connector Terminal
13
LH
8 P
B110 — 0V
3
RH
4
YES >> Replace front door speaker. Refer to AV-172, "Removal and Installation".

U1626, U162E FRONT SQUAWKER
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Signal (terminal) amp. and tweeter LH (terminals 16 and
OPEN 29)
Threshold –
SHORT 29)
Threshold –
F-INST L-SQUAWK Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

U1626
(Tweeter LH) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
GND- Signal (terminal) amp. and tweeter LH (terminals 16 and
SHORT 29)
Threshold –
VB-SHOR 29)
Threshold –

(Trouble diagnosis content) A
Signal (terminal) amp. and tweeter RH (terminals 31 and B
OPEN 30)
Threshold –
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more C
D
Signal (terminal) amp. and tweeter RH (terminals 31 and
SHORT 30)
Threshold –
E
F-INST R-SQUAWK Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
U162E
(Tweeter RH) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Sound signal between BOSE speaker F
GND- Signal (terminal) amp. and tweeter RH (terminals 31 and
SHORT 30)
Threshold –
G
Sound signal between BOSE speaker H
Signal (terminal) amp. and tweeter RH (terminals 31 and
VB-SHOR 30)
Threshold – I
POSSIBLE CAUSE J
• Tweeter LH circuit
• Tweeter LH
• Tweeter RH circuit
• Tweeter RH K
FAIL-SAFE
—
L
M
With CONSULT
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more. AV
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1626 or U162E detected? O
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End. P

1.CHECK SOUND SIGNAL CIRCUITS FOR OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND

2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B109 and suspect tweeter connector.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B109 and suspect tweeter connector.
BOSE speaker amp. Tweeter

Continuity
16 1
M143 (LH)
29 2
B109 Yes
31 1
M144 (RH)
30 2
BOSE speaker amp.

Continuity
16
29
B109 — No
31
30
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check the continuity between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector B109 for the suspect tweeter.
BOSE speaker amp.

Tweeter Continuity
Connector Terminal
16 29 LH
B109 No
31 30 RH
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. Check the voltage between BOSE amp. connector B109 and ground for the suspect tweeter.
BOSE speaker amp.

Ground Tweeter Voltage
Connector Terminal
16
LH
29
B109 — 0V
31
RH
30
YES >> Replace tweeter. Refer to AV-169, "Removal and Installation".

U162A CENTER SPEAKER
A

Signal (terminal) amp. and center speaker (terminals 17 D
OPEN and 18)
Threshold –
Signal (terminal) amp. and center speaker (terminals 17 F
SHORT and 18)
Threshold –
F-INST C-SQUAWK
U162A
(Center speaker) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
H
GND- Signal (terminal) amp. and center speaker (terminals 17
SHORT and 18)
Threshold –
I
Signal (terminal) amp. and center speaker (terminals 17
VB-SHOR and 18)
Threshold –
K
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Center speaker circuit L
• Center speaker
FAIL-SAFE
M
No sound from center speaker
With CONSULT
5. Check DTC. P
Is DTC U162A detected?


2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B109 and center speaker connector.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B109 and center speaker connector.
BOSE speaker amp. Center speaker

Continuity
17 1
B109 M301 Yes
18 2
BOSE speaker amp.

Continuity
17
B109 — No
18
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check the continuity between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector B109 for the center speaker.
BOSE speaker amp.

Continuity
Connector Terminal
B109 17 18 No
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. Check the voltage between BOSE amp. connector B109 and ground for the center speaker.
BOSE speaker amp.

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
17
B109 — 0V
18
YES >> Replace center speaker. Refer to AV-170, "Removal and Installation".

U170A, U1712 REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A

Signal (terminal) amp. and rear door speaker LH (termi- D
OPEN nals 22 and 33)
Threshold –
Signal (terminal) amp. and rear door speaker LH (termi- F
Threshold –
RL-DOOR SQUAWK
U170A
(Rear door speaker LH) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
H
GND- Signal (terminal) amp. and rear door speaker LH (termi-
Threshold –
I
Signal (terminal) amp. and rear door speaker LH (termi-
Threshold –
K
AV

Signal (terminal) amp. and rear door speaker RH (termi-
OPEN nals 23 and 34)
Threshold –
Threshold –
RR-DOOR SQUAWK Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

U1712
(Rear door speaker RH) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
GND- Signal (terminal) amp. and rear door speaker RH (termi-
Threshold –
Threshold –
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Rear door speaker LH circuit
• Rear door speaker LH
• Rear door speaker RH circuit
• Rear door speaker RH
FAIL-SAFE
—
With CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U170A or U1712 detected?

1.CHECK SOUND SIGNAL CIRCUITS FOR OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND A

2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B109 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B109 and suspect rear door speaker con-
B
nector.
BOSE speaker amp. Rear door speaker

Continuity C
22 1
D202 (LH)
33 2 D
B109 Yes
23 1
D302 (RH)
34 2
E
BOSE speaker amp. F

Continuity
22
33 G
B109 — No
23
34
H
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check the continuity between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector B109 for the suspect rear door
speaker. J
BOSE speaker amp.

Rear door speaker Continuity K
Connector Terminal
22 33 LH
B109 No
23 34 RH L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. M
1. Turn ignition switch ON. AV
2. Check the voltage between BOSE amp. connector B109 and ground for the suspect rear door speaker.
BOSE speaker amp. O

Ground Rear door speaker Voltage
Connector Terminal
22
LH
33 P
B109 — 0V
23
RH
34
YES >> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-173, "Removal and Installation".

U1721, U1729 WOOFER
U1721, U1729 WOOFER
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Signal (terminal) amp. and rear subwoofer LH (terminals 5
OPEN and 6)
Threshold –
SHORT and 6)
Threshold –
R-PSHELF L-WOOFER Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

U1721
(Rear subwoofer LH) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
GND- Signal (terminal) amp. and rear subwoofer LH (terminals 5
SHORT and 6)
Threshold –
VB-SHOR and 6)
Threshold –

U1721, U1729 WOOFER
(Trouble diagnosis content) A
Signal (terminal) amp. and rear subwoofer RH (terminals 1 B
OPEN and 2)
Threshold –
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more C
D
Signal (terminal) amp. and rear subwoofer RH (terminals 1
SHORT and 2)
Threshold –
E
R-PSHELF R-WOOFER Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
U1729
(Rear subwoofer RH) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Sound signal between BOSE speaker F
GND- Signal (terminal) amp. and rear subwoofer RH (terminals 1
SHORT and 2)
Threshold –
G
Sound signal between BOSE speaker H
Signal (terminal) amp. and rear subwoofer RH (terminals 1
VB-SHOR and 2)
Threshold – I
POSSIBLE J
• Rear subwoofer LH circuit
• Rear subwoofer LH
• Rear subwoofer RH circuit
• Rear subwoofer RH K
FAIL-SAFE
—
L
M
With CONSULT
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more. AV
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1721 or U1729 detected? O
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End. P

U1721, U1729 WOOFER

2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B110 and suspect rear subwoofer connector.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B110 and suspect rear subwoofer connec-
tor.
BOSE speaker amp. Rear subwoofer

Continuity
5 1
B106 (LH)
6 2
B110 Yes
1 1
B107 (RH)
2 2
BOSE speaker amp.

Continuity
5
6
B110 — No
1
2
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check the continuity between the terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector B110 for the suspect rear sub-
woofer.
BOSE speaker amp.

Rear subwoofer Continuity
Connector Terminal
5 6 LH
B110 No
1 2 RH
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. Check the voltage between BOSE amp. connector B110 and ground for the suspect rear subwoofer.
BOSE speaker amp.

Ground Rear subwoofer Voltage
Connector Terminal
5
LH
6
B110 — 0V
1
RH
2
YES >> Replace rear subwoofer. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation".

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
A
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000014275790
B

C
1.CHECK FUSE
2. Check that the following fuses are not blown:
Power source Fuse No. Capacity

E
Battery 15 20 A
Ignition switch ACC 21 10 A
F
Ignition switch ON or START 30 10 A
Is a fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit. G
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT BATTERY POWER SUPPLY H
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M162.
I

Ground
J
M162 19 (—) Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3. K
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY L
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
M
Ground
M162 7 (—) Battery voltage AV

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. O
4.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT IGNITION POWER SUPPLY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P
3. Turn ignition switch to ON.


Ground

YES >> GO TO 4.
5.CHECK CASE GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Check the continuity between AV control unit case and ground.
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000014275791
1.CHECK FUSE

11 15 A
Battery
12 15 A
Is a fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BOSE SPEAKER AMP. BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B110.
2. Check the voltage between BOSE speaker amp. connector B110 and ground.

Ground
10
B110 (—) Battery voltage
11
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BOSE SPEAKER AMP. ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149.
2. Check the voltage between BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and ground.


A
Ground
B149 53 (—) Battery voltage

B
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. C
4.CHECK BOSE SPEAKER AMP. GROUND CIRCUIT
D
BOSE speaker amp.
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
E
7
B110 — Yes
12
Is the inspection result normal? F
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH G
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000014275792

I
1.CHECK FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
2. Check that the following fuse is not blown:
Power source Fuse No. Capacity K

Is the fuse blown?
L
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY M
2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector.
3. Check the voltage between multifunction switch connector M259 and ground. AV
Multifunction switch Voltage

Ground
Connector Terminal (Approx.) O
P
YES >> GO TO 2.
3.CHECK MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Check the continuity between multifunction switch connector M259 and ground.

Multifunction switch
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M259 2 — Yes

TWEETER
TWEETER
A
B
C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit, Bose speaker amp. and tweeter connectors for the following:
• Proper connection D
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.) F
1. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B109 and suspect tweeter connector.
2. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B109 and suspect tweeter connector.
G
Bose speaker amp. Tweeter
Continuity
H
16 1
M143 (LH)
29 2
B109 Yes
31 1 I
M144 (RH)
30 2
3. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B109 and ground.
J
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal K
16
29
B109 — No L
31
30
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TWEETER SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.) AV
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B109 and suspect tweeter connector.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch. O
4. Check signal between the terminals of Bose speaker amp. connector B109.
Bose speaker amp. connector B109 P

Terminal Terminal

TWEETER
16 29
Audio signal output

31 30
SKIB3609E

NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AV CONTROL UNIT)
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
2. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B149 and AV control unit connector M162.
3. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B149 and AV control unit connector M162.
Bose speaker amp. AV control unit

Continuity
62 2
42 3
B149 M162 Yes
63 11
43 12
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
62
42
B149 — No
63
43
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK TWEETER SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT)
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B149 and AV control unit connector M162.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between AV control unit connector M162 and ground.
AV control unit connector M162

Terminal Terminal
2 3
Audio signal output

11 12
SKIB3609E

TWEETER
YES >> Replace Bose speaker amp. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-164, "Removal and Installation". A
AV

CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit, Bose speaker amp. and center speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.)
1. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B109 and center speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B109 and center speaker connector M301.
Bose speaker amp. Center speaker

Continuity
17 1
B109 M301 Yes
18 2
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
17
B109 — No
18
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.)
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B109 and center speaker connector.

Terminal Terminal
17 18 Audio signal output
SKIB3609E

CENTER SPEAKER
YES >> Replace center speaker. Refer to AV-170, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4. A
4.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AV CONTROL UNIT)
B

C
Continuity
62 2 D
42 3
B149 M162 Yes
63 11
43 12 E
F
Bose speaker amp.
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
62 G
42
B149 — No
63
H
43
YES >> GO TO 5. I
5.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT)
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B149 and AV control unit connector M162. J
4. Check signal between AV control unit connector M162 and ground. K

(+) (−) Condition Reference value L
Terminal Terminal
2 3
M
Audio signal output

11 12 AV
SKIB3609E
O
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-164, "Removal and Installation". P

FRONT DOOR TWEETER
FRONT DOOR TWEETER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit, Bose speaker amp. and front door tweeter connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.)
1. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B109 and suspect front door tweeter connector.
2. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B109 and suspect front door tweeter connector.
Bose speaker amp. Front door tweeter

Continuity
24 1
D18 (LH)
35 2
B109 Yes
19 1
D111 (RH)
32 2
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
24
35
B109 — No
19
32
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR TWEETER SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.)
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B109 and suspect front door tweeter connector.

Terminal Terminal

FRONT DOOR TWEETER
24 35
A
Audio signal output

19 32 B
SKIB3609E
C
YES >> Replace front door tweeter. Refer to AV-171, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
D
4.CHECK FRONT DOOR TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AV CONTROL UNIT)
2. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B149 and AV control unit connector M162. E
Bose speaker amp. AV control unit F

Continuity
62 2
G
42 3
B149 M162 Yes
63 11
43 12 H
Bose speaker amp. I

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
62
J
42
B149 — No
63
43 K
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. L
5.CHECK FRONT DOOR TWEETER SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT)

1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B149 and AV control unit connector M162. M
AV

(+) (−) Condition Reference value O
Terminal Terminal
2 3
P
Audio signal output

11 12
SKIB3609E

FRONT DOOR TWEETER

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
B
C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit, Bose speaker amp. and front door speaker connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.) F
1. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B110 and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B110 and suspect front door speaker connector.
G
Bose speaker amp. Front door speaker
Continuity
H
13 1
D3 (LH)
8 2
B110 Yes
3 1 I
D103 (RH)
4 2
J
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
13
8
B110 — No L
3
4
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.) AV
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B110 and suspect front door speaker connector.

Terminal Terminal

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
13 8
Audio signal output

3 4
SKIB3609E

NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AV CONTROL UNIT)

Continuity
62 2
42 3
B149 M162 Yes
63 11
43 12
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
62
42
B149 — No
63
43
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT)

Terminal Terminal
2 3
Audio signal output

11 12
SKIB3609E

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit, Bose speaker amp. and rear door speaker connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.)
1. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B109 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B109 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
Bose speaker amp. Rear door speaker

Continuity
22 1
D202 (LH)
33 2
B109 Yes
23 1
D302 (RH)
34 2
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
22
33
B109 — No
23
34
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.)
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B109 and suspect rear door speaker connector.

Terminal Terminal

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
22 33
A
Audio signal output

23 34 B
SKIB3609E
C
NO >> GO TO 4.
D
4.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AV CONTROL UNIT)
2. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B149 and AV control unit connector M162. E
Bose speaker amp. AV control unit F

Continuity
62 2
G
42 3
B149 M162 Yes
63 11
43 12 H
Bose speaker amp. I

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
62
J
42
B149 — No
63
43 K
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. L
5.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT)

1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B149 and AV control unit connector M162. M
AV

(+) (−) Condition Reference value O
Terminal Terminal
2 3
P
Audio signal output

11 12
SKIB3609E

REAR DOOR SPEAKER

REAR SUBWOOFER
REAR SUBWOOFER
A
B
C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit, Bose speaker amp. and rear subwoofer connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.) F
1. Disconnect Bose speaker amp. connector B110 and suspect rear subwoofer connector.
2. Check continuity between Bose speaker amp. connector B110 and suspect rear subwoofer connector.
G
Bose speaker amp. Rear subwoofer
Continuity
H
5 1
B106 (LH)
6 2
B110 Yes
1 1 I
B107 (RH)
2 2
J
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
5
6
B110 — No L
1
2
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REAR SUBWOOFER SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP.) AV
1. Connect Bose speaker amp. connector B110 and suspect rear subwoofer connector.

Terminal Terminal

REAR SUBWOOFER
5 6
Audio signal output

1 2
SKIB3609E

YES >> Replace rear subwoofer. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK REAR SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY (AV CONTROL UNIT)

Continuity
62 2
42 3
B149 M162 Yes
63 11
43 12
Bose speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
62
42
B149 — No
63
43
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK REAR SUBWOOFER SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT)

Terminal Terminal
2 3
Audio signal output

11 12
SKIB3609E

REAR SUBWOOFER
AV

MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
WITH TELEMATICS SYSTEM
WITH TELEMATICS SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000014275799
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-39, "Wiring Diagram" (MULTI AV WITH BOSE AUDIO
SYSTEM) and AV-416, "Wiring Diagram" (TELEMATICS SYSTEM).
1.CHECK CONTINUITY OF CIRCUITS BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND TCU

3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M163 and TCU connector M173.
AV control unit TCU

Continuity
46 12
M163 M173 Yes
48 11
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
44
M163 — No
48
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT)
1. Connect TCU connector M173.
3. Check the signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M163.

Terminal
46 48 Speak into microphone.
PKIB5037J

NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CONTINUITY OF CIRCUITS BETWEEN TCU AND MICROPHONE
2. Disconnect TCU connector M173 and microphone connector.
3. Check continuity between TCU connector M173 and microphone connector R22.

TCU Microphone A
Continuity
16 2
B
M173 17 R22 1 Yes
18 4
4. Check the continuity between TCU connector M173 and ground. C
TCU
Ground Continuity D
Connector Terminal
17
M173 — No
18 E
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. F
4.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE POWER SUPPLY
1. Connect TCU connector M173.
G
3. Check the voltage between TCU connector M173 and ground.
H
TCU Voltage
Ground
M173 18 (—) I
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-459, "Removal and Installation". J
5.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL (TCU)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
2. Connect microphone connector.
4. Check the signal between the terminals of TCU connector M173.
L
TCU connector M173
M
Terminal
AV

O
PKIB5037J
Is the inspection result normal? P

YES >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-459, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-180, "Removal and Installation".
WITHOUT TELEMATICS SYSTEM

WITHOUT TELEMATICS SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000014275800
1.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL

2. Check the signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M163.

Terminal
PKIB5037J

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE VCC
2. Disconnect microphone connector.
4. Check the voltage between the terminals of microphone connector R22.
Microphone connector R22

Voltage
(+) (−)
(Approx.)
Terminal
4 2 5.0 V
YES >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-180, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MICROPHONE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M163 and microphone connector R22.
AV control unit Microphone

Continuity
46 1
M163 47 R22 4 Yes
48 2
YES >> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK MICROPHONE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT A

Check the continuity between AV control unit connector M163 and ground.
(+) B
AV control unit (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal
C
46
M163 Ground No
47
Is the inspection result normal? D
E
AV

ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL MICROPHONE
1.CHECK ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL MICROPHONE CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and active noise control microphone connectors.
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and active noise control microphone con-
nectors.
BOSE speaker amp. Active noise control microphone

Continuity
69 1
R20 (front left)
49 2
60 1
B149 R19 (front right) Yes
40 2
68 1
R23 (rear)
48 2
BOSE speaker amp.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
69
B149 60 — No
68
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL MICROPHONE SIGNAL
1. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B149 and active noise control microphone connectors.
2. Check signal between terminals of BOSE speaker amp. connector B149.
BOSE speaker amp. connector B149

Terminal Terminal
69 49
60 40
When interior sound is input

68 48
SKIB3609E

NO >> Replace active noise control microphone. Refer to AV-181, "Removal and Installation - Front" or
AV-181, "Removal and Installation - Rear".

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
A
B
1.CHECK STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH RESISTANCE

D
2. Disconnect combination switch connector M149.
3. Check resistance between combination switch connector terminals.
E
Combination switch connector M149 Resistance Ω
Condition
Terminal Terminal (Approx.)
F
Depress SOURCE switch. 1
Depress switch. 121
16 321 G
Depress switch.
Depress switch. 723
Depress OK switch. 2023 H

19
Depress switch. 1
Depress switch. 121 I

17
Depress switch. 321
Depress DISP BACK switch. 723 J

Depress DISP switch. 2023
K
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace steering switches. Refer to AV-166, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND COMBINATION METER L
1. Disconnect combination meter connector M24 and combination switch connector M30.
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and combination switch connector M30.
M
Combination meter Combination switch
Continuity
21 11 AV
M24 22 M30 9 Yes
23 8
O
3. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and ground.
Combination meter P
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
21
M24 22 — No
23

STEERING SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH
Check continuity between combination switch connectors M30 and M149.
Combination switch
Continuity
8 17
M30 9 M149 16 Yes
11 19
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-16, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND AV CONTROL UNIT
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M23 and AV control unit connector M163.
Combination meter AV control unit

Continuity
49 23
M23 M163 Yes
50 24
Combination meter
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
M23 — No
50

USB INTERFACE
USB INTERFACE
A
B
USB INTERFACE-1 C
1.CHECK USB INTERFACE-1 HARNESS CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M164 and USB interface-1 connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M164 and USB interface-1 connector M190.
E
AV control unit USB interface-1
Continuity
61 1 F
63 3
M164 64 M190 4 Yes
G
65 5
66 6
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M164 and ground. H
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal I
61
M164 — No
64
J
YES >> Replace the USB interface. Refer to AV-168, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. K
USB INTERFACE-2
1.CHECK USB INTERFACE-2 HARNESS CONTINUITY L

M

Continuity AV
76 1
78 3 O
M157 79 M191 4 Yes
80 5
P
81 6

USB INTERFACE
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
76
M157 — No
79

AUX IN JACK
AUX IN JACK
A
B
C
1.CHECK AUX IN JACK HARNESS CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M163 and AUX in jack connector. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M163 and AUX in jack connector M172.
AV control unit AUX in jack E

Continuity
49 1
F
M163 50 M172 4 Yes
51 3
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M163 and ground. G
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal H
49
M163 — No
50
I
YES >> Replace the AUX in jack. Refer to AV-168, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. J
AV

MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE)]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
MULTI AV SYSTEM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000014275805
RELATED TO AUDIO
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location

Malfunction in AV control unit.
The disk cannot be removed. AV control unit Refer to AV-26, "On Board Diagnosis Func-
tion".
• Speaker circuit shorted to ground.
Refer to AV-39, "Wiring Diagram".
No sound from all speakers.
ground circuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-121, "BOSE SPEAKER AMP
: Diagnosis Procedure".
• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between
Bose speaker amp. and speaker and AV
control unit and Bose speaker amp.
Refer to:
- AV-124, "Diagnosis Procedure" (tweet-
er).
- AV-127, "Diagnosis Procedure" (center
speaker).
- AV-129, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front
door tweeter).
door speaker).
- AV-135, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear
No sound comes out or the level of the door speaker).
sound is low. Only a certain speaker (tweeter LH, tweeter - AV-138, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear
RH, center speaker, front door tweeter LH, subwoofer).
front door tweeter RH, front door speaker • Malfunction in speaker.
LH, front door speaker RH, rear door Refer to:
speaker LH, rear door speaker RH, rear - AV-169, "Removal and Installation"
subwoofer LH and rear subwoofer RH) (tweeter).
does not output sound. - AV-170, "Removal and Installation" (cen-
ter speaker).
- AV-171, "Removal and Installation" (front
door tweeter).
door speaker).
- AV-173, "Removal and Installation" (rear
door speaker).
subwoofer).
• Malfunction in AV control unit.
Refer to AV-26, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".
• Malfunction in Bose speaker amp.
Replace Bose speaker amp. Refer to AV-
175, "Removal and Installation".

MULTI AV SYSTEM
A
Function".
Noise comes out from all speakers.
• Malfunction in Bose speaker amp. B
Replace Bose speaker amp. Refer to AV-
C
audio amp. and speaker and AV control
unit and audio amp.
Refer to: D
er).
- AV-127, "Diagnosis Procedure" (center
speaker). E
door tweeter).
door speaker). F
door speaker).
Noise comes out only from a certain speak- - AV-138, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear
er (tweeter LH, tweeter RH, center speaker, subwoofer). G
Noise is mixed with audio. front door tweeter LH, front door tweeter • Malfunction in speaker.
RH, front door speaker LH, front door Refer to:
speaker RH, rear door speaker LH, rear - AV-169, "Removal and Installation"
H
door speaker RH, rear subwoofer LH and (tweeter).
rear subwoofer RH). - AV-170, "Removal and Installation" (cen-
ter speaker).
- AV-171, "Removal and Installation" (front I
door tweeter).
door speaker).
- AV-173, "Removal and Installation" (rear J
door speaker).
subwoofer).
• Malfunction in AV control unit. K
Function".
• Malfunction in Bose speaker amp.
Replace Bose speaker amp. Refer to AV- L
Poor connector connection of antenna or
Noise is mixed with radio only (when the ve-
antenna feeder. M
hicle hits a bump or while driving over bad
Refer to AV-17, "Antennas, Antenna Amp.
roads)
and Antenna Feeder".
• Other audio sounds are normal. AV
• Any radio station cannot be received or Poor connector connection of antenna or
poor reception is caused even after mov- antenna feeder.
No radio reception or poor reception.
ing to a service area with good reception Refer to AV-17, "Antennas, Antenna Amp.
(e.g. a place with clear view and no ob- and Antenna Feeder". O
stacles generating external noises).

MULTI AV SYSTEM
• Malfunction in antenna, antenna feeder
or AV control unit. Perform DTC diagno-
sis.
There is malfunction in the CONSULT self Refer to AV-89, "Diagnosis Procedure".
diagnosis result. • Poor continuity in antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-28, "CONSULT Function". • Poor connector connection of antenna or
antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-17, "Antennas, Antenna
No satellite radio reception. Amp. and Antenna Feeder".
• Poor continuity in antenna feeder.
• Poor connector connection of antenna or
There is no malfunction in the CONSULT antenna feeder.
self diagnosis result. • Loose satellite radio antenna mounting
Refer to AV-28, "CONSULT Function". nut.
Amp. and Antenna Feeder".
The majority of buzz/rattle sounds are not
Refer to "SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROU-
indicative of an issue with the speaker, usu-
Buzz/rattle sound from speaker BLE DIAGNOSIS" in the appropriate interi-
ally something nearby the speaker is caus-
or trim section.
ing the buzz/rattle.
RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE

• Before performing diagnosis, confirm that the cellular phone being used by the customer is compatible with
the vehicle.
• It is possible that a malfunction is occurring due to a version change of the phone even though the phone is
a compatible type. This can be confirmed by changing the cellular phone to another compatible type, and
check that it operates normally. It is important to determine whether the cause of the malfunction is the vehi-
cle or the cellular phone.
Check Compatibility
1. Make sure the customer’s Bluetooth® related concern is understood.
2. Verify the customer’s concern.
NOTE:
The customer’s phone may be required, depending upon their concern.
3. Write down the customer’s phone brand, model and service provider.
NOTE:
It is necessary to know the service provider. On occasion, a given phone may be on the approved list with
one provider, but may not be on the approved list with other providers.
4. Go to “www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/”.
a. Using the website’s search engine, find out if the customer’s phone is on the approved list.
b. If the customer’s phone is NOT on the approved list:
Stop diagnosis here. The customer needs to obtain a Bluetooth® phone that is on the approved list before
any further action.
c. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “N” (not compatible):
Stop diagnosis here. If the customer still wants the feature to function, they will need to get an approved
phone showing the feature as “Y” (compatible) in the “Basic Features”.
d. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “Y” (compatible):
Perform diagnosis as per the following table.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location A

Does not recognize cellular phone connec-
tion (no connection is displayed on the dis- Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
play at the guide).
B
• Hands-free phone operation can be
made, but the communication cannot be
established. Malfunction in AV control unit.
Hands-free phone cannot be established. • Hands-free phone operation can be per- Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-164,
C
formed, however, voice between each "Removal and Installation".
other cannot be heard during the conver-
sation.
D
The other party’s voice cannot be heard by Check the “microphone speaker” in Inspec-
hands-free phone. tion & Adjustment Mode if sound is heard.
Sound operation function is normal. E
Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
Originating sound is not heard by the other Refer to AV-141, "WITH TELEMATICS
party with hands-free phone communica- SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure" (with
tion. Sound operation function does not work. F
telematics system) or AV-143, "WITHOUT
TELEMATICS SYSTEM : Diagnosis Proce-
dure" (without telematics system).
• The voice recognition can be controlled. Steering switch malfunction. G
• Steering switch’s and Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-166,
switch works, but does not work. "Removal and Installation".
The system cannot be operated. H

Steering switch’s , and Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
switches do not work. Refer to AV-146, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Steering switch ground circuit malfunction.

All steering switches do not work. I
RELATED TO NAVIGATION
J
• Malfunction in SD card.
• Malfunction in AV control unit. K
Navigation malfunction.
Function".
Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
Steering switches malfunction. L
Navigation system is inoperative. Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-141, "WITH TELEMATICS
SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure" (with M
telematics system) or AV-143, "WITHOUT
Voice activated control malfunction.
TELEMATICS SYSTEM : Diagnosis Proce-
dure" (without telematics system).
Steering switch signal circuit malfunction. AV

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
RELATED TO NOISE
The majority of the audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference,
etc.).
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to moun-
tains or buildings blocking the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the
antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings.
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and opera-
tion of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause.
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
components, one by one.
Type of Noise and Possible Cause
Occurrence condition Possible cause

A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
Occurs only when engine is ON. • Ignition components
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.
The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump. • Fuel pump condenser
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op- • Relay malfunction, AV control unit malfunc-
Noise only occurs when various eration of various switches. tion
electrical components are oper-
ating. The noise occurs when various motors are operat- • Motor case ground
ing. • Motor
• Rear defogger coil malfunction
The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions. • Open circuit in printed heater
• Poor ground of antenna feeder line
• Ground wire of body parts
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when
• Ground due to improper part installation
it is vibrating excessively.
• Wiring connections or a short circuit
Symptom Cause and Counter measure
Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized

Does not recognize cellular phone connection (No connection is by the in-vehicle phone module.
displayed on the display at the guide). Refer to “RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE (Check Compati-
bility)” in AV-151, "Symptom Table".
Customer will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the fol-
lowing conditions:
• The vehicle is outside of the telephone service area.
• The vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio
waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage,
near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
Cannot use hands-free phone. • The cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
NOTE:
While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wire-
less connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System cannot charge cellular phones.

A
When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too
The other party’s voice cannot be heard by hands-free phone. loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a
call.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or B
Poor sound quality. far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection disruption.
RELATED TO NAVIGATION C
Basic Operation
D
Symptom Cause Remedy
No image is shown. Display brightness adjustment is set fully to DARK Adjust the display brightness.
side.
E
No guide sound is heard. Volume control is set to OFF, MIN or MAX. Adjust the audio guide volume.
Audio guide volume is too low or
Audio guidance is not available while the vehicle is System is not malfunctioning.
too high.
driving on a dark pink route.
F
Screen is too dark. Temperature inside the vehicle is low. Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle
Motion of the image is too slow. reaches the proper temperature.
Small black or bright spots appear Symptom peculiar to a liquid crystal display (dis- System is not malfunctioning. G
on the screen. play unit).
Vehicle Mark
H
Map screen and BIRDVIEW™ Some thinning of the character data is done to pre- System is not malfunctioning.
Name of the place vary with the vent the display becoming to complex. In some I
screen. cases and in some locations, the display contents
may differ.
The same place name, street name, etc. may not
be displayed every time on account of the data J
processing.
Vehicle mark is not positioned cor- Vehicle is transferred by ferry or by towing after its Drive the vehicle for a while in the GPS sat-
rectly. ignition switch is turned to OFF. ellite signal receiving condition. K
Screen will not switch to nighttime The daytime screen is selected by the “SWITCH Perform screen dimming and select the
mode after the lighting switch is SCREENS” when the last time the screen dim- nighttime screen by “SWITCH SCREENS”.
turned ON. ming setting is done.
Switching between daytime/nighttime screen may L
be inhibited by the automatic illumination adjust-
ment function.
Map screen will not scroll in accor- Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current lo- M
dance with the vehicle travel. cation.
Vehicle mark will not be shown. Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current lo-
cation. AV
Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite GPS satellite signal is intercepted because the ve- Move the vehicle out to an open space.
mark) on the map screen stays hicle is in or behind a building.
gray.
GPS satellite signal cannot be received because Do not place anything on top of the meter dis- O
an obstacle is placed on top of the instrument pan- play (instrument panel).
el.
GPS satellites are not visible from current location. Wait until GPS satellites are visible by mov-
P
ing the vehicle.

Vehicle location accuracy is low. Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the Current location is not determined.
map screen stays gray.
Vehicle speed setting by the vehicle speed pulse Drive the vehicle for a while [for approx. 30
has been deviated (advanced or retarded) from minutes at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH)] and
the actual vehicle speed because tire chain is fit- the deviation will be automatically adjusted. If
ted or the system has been used on another vehi- advancement or retard still occur, perform
cle. the distance adjustment by CONFIRMA-
TION/ADJUSTMENT mode of diagnosis
function.
Map data has error or omission. (Vehicle mark is As a rule, an updated map DVD–ROM will be
always deviated to the same position.) released once a year.
Destination, Passing Points and Menu Items Cannot be Selected/Set

Destination cannot be set. Destination to be set is on an expressway. Set the destination on an ordinary road.
Passing point is not searched The vehicle has already passed the passing point, To include the passing points that have been
when re-searching the route. or the system judged so. passed into the route again, set the route
again.
Route information will not be dis- Route searching has not been done. Set the destination and perform route
played. searching.
Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route.
Route guide is turned OFF. Turn route guide ON.
Route information is not available on the dark pink System is not malfunctioning.
route.
After the route searching, no guide Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route.
sign will appear as the vehicle (On the display, only guide signs related to the rec-
goes near the entrance/exit to the ommended route will be shown.)
toll road.
Automatic route searching is not Vehicle is driving on a highway (gray route), or no Drive on a road to be searched. Or re–search
possible. recommended route is available. the route manually. In this case, however, the
whole route will be searched.
Performed automatic detour Performed search with every condition consid- System is not malfunctioning.
search (or detour search). Howev- ered. However, the result is the same as that of the
er, the result is the same as that of previous search.
the previous search.
Passing points cannot be set. More than five passing points were set. Passing points can be set up to five. To stop
at more than five points, perform sharing in
several steps.
When setting the route, the starting The current vehicle location is always set as the System is not malfunctioning.
point cannot be selected. starting point of a route.
Some menu items cannot be se- The vehicle is being driven. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and then op-
lected. erate the system.
Voice Guide

Symptom Cause Remedy A

Voice guide will not operate. Note: Voice guide is only available at intersections System is not malfunctioning.
that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by z on
the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given
B
even when the route on the map changes direction.
The vehicle is not on the recommended route. Return to the recommended route or re-
search the route.
C
Voice guide is turned OFF. Turn voice guide ON.
Voice guide does not match the ac- Voice guide may vary with the direction to which Drive in conformity to the actual traffic rules. D
tual road pattern. the vehicle is turned and the connection of the road
to other roads.
Route Search E

No route is shown. No road to be searched is found around the des- Find wider road (orange road or wider) near- F
tination. by and reset the destination and passing
points onto it. Take care of the traveling direc-
tion when there are separate up and down
roads. G
Starting point and the destination are too close. Set the destination at more distant point.
Conditional traffic regulation (day of the week/ Turn the time-regulating search conditions
time of the day) is set at the area around the cur- OFF. Turn “Avoid regulation time” in the H
rent location or the destination. search conditions OFF.
Indicated route is intermittent. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not System is not malfunctioning.
used for the search(Note)Therefore, the route to I
the current location or the passing points may be
intermittent.
When the vehicle has passed the A recommended route is controlled by each sec- System is not malfunctioning. J
recommended route, it is deleted tion. When the vehicle has passed the passing
from the screen. point 1, then the map data from the starting point
up to the passing point 1 will be deleted. (The data
may remain undeleted in some area.) K
Detouring route is recommended. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not Set the route closer to the basic route (gray
used for the search. (Note). Therefore, detour route).
route may be recommended. L
A detour route may be shown when some traffic Slightly move the starting point or the destina-
regulation (one-way traffic, etc.) is set at the area tion, or set the passing point on the route of
around the starting point or the destination. your choice.
M
In the area where highways (gray routes) are System is not malfunctioning.
used for the search, left turn has priority around
the current location and the destination (passing
points). For this reason, the recommended route AV
may be detouring.
Landmarks on the map do not This can happen due to omission or error in the As a rule, an updated map DVD-ROM will be
match the actual ones. map data. released once a year. Wait until the latest O
map has become available.
Recommended route is far from Starting point, passing points, and destination of Reset the destination onto the road nearby. If
the starting point, passing points, the route guide were set far from the desired this road is one of the highways (gray routes),
P
and destination. points because route searching data around an ordinary road nearby may be displayed as
these area were not stored. the recommended route.
NOTE:
Except for the ordinance-designated cities. (Malfunctioning areas may be changed in the updated map disc.)
Examples of Current-Location Mark Displacement

Vehicle's travel amount is calculated by reading its travel distance and turning angle. Therefore, if the vehicle
is driven in the following manner, an error will occur in the vehicle's current location display. If correct location
has not been restored after driving the vehicle for a while, perform location correction.
SEL698V

Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.) A
Y–intersections
At a Y intersection or similar gradual divi-

sion of roads, an error in the direction of B
travel deduced by the sensor may result in
the current-location mark appearing on the
wrong road.
C
ELK0192D
Spiral roads
D
When driving on a large, continuous spiral
road (such as loop bridge), turning angle
error is accumulated and the vehicle mark
E
may deviate from the correct location.
ELK0193D
Straight roads
F
When driving on a long, straight road and
slow curve without stopping, map-matching
does not work effectively enough and dis-
tance errors may accumulate. As a result,
G
the vehicle mark may deviate from the cor-
rect location when the vehicle is turned at a
If after travelling about 10 km (6
corner. H
miles) the correct location has
Road config- ELK0194D
not been restored, perform lo-
uration Zigzag roads cation correction and, if neces-
sary, direction correction.
When driving on a zigzag road, the map I
may be matched to other roads in the simi-
lar direction nearby at every turn, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the correct
location. J
ELK0195D
Roads laid out in a grid pattern K

When driving where roads are laid out in a
grid pattern, or where many roads are run-
ning in the similar direction nearby, the map
may be matched to them by mistake and L
rect location.
ELK0196D
M
Parallel roads
When two roads are running in parallel

(such as highway and sideway), the map AV
may be matched to the other road by mis-
take and the vehicle mark may deviate from
the correct location.
O
ELK0197D

Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.)
In a parking lot When driving in a parking lot, or other loca-
tion where there are no roads on the map,
matching may place the vehicle mark on a
nearby road. When the vehicle returns to
the road, the vehicle mark may have devi-
ated from the correct location.
When driving in circle or turning the steer-
ing wheel repeatedly, direction errors accu-
SEL709V
mulate, and the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct location.
Turntable
When the ignition switch is OFF, the navi-
gation system cannot get the signal from
the gyroscope (angular speed sensor).
Place Therefore, the displayed direction may be
wrong and the correct road may not be eas-
ily returned to after rotating the vehicle on a
turntable with the ignition OFF.
SEL710V
Slippery roads On snow, wet roads, gravel, or other roads

where tires may slip easily, accumulated
mileage errors may cause the vehicle mark If after travelling about 10 km (6
to deviate from the correct road. miles) the correct location has
Slopes When parking in sloped garages, when
cation correction and, if neces-
travelling on banked roads, or in other cas-
es where the vehicle turns when tilted, an
error in the turning angle will occur, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the road.
Road not displayed on the map screen
When driving on new roads or other roads
not displayed on the map screen, map
matching does not function correctly and
matches the location to a nearby road.
When the vehicle returns to a road which is
on the map, the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct road.
SEL699V
Map data Different road pattern

(Changed due to repair)
If the road pattern stored in the map data
and the actual road pattern are different,
map matching does not function correctly
and matches the location to a nearby road.
The vehicle mark may deviate from the cor-
rect road.
ELK0201D
Drive the vehicle for a while. If

the distance still deviates, ad-
When tire chains are used, the mileage is
just it by using the distance ad-
Vehicle Use of tire chains not correctly detected, and the vehicle mark
justment function. (If the tire
may deviate from the correct road.
chain is removed, recover the
original value.)

A
If the vehicle is driven just after the engine
is started when the gyroscope (angular
Wait for a short while before
Just after the engine is started speed sensor) correction is not completed,
driving after starting the engine.
the vehicle can lose its direction and may B
have deviated from the correct location.
Continuous driving without stopping When driving long distances without stop-
Precautions ping, direction errors may accumulate, and
for driving the current-location mark may deviate from
Stop and adjust the orientation. C
the correct road.
Abusive driving Spinning the wheels or engaging in other If after travelling about 10 km (6
kinds of abusive driving may result in the miles) the correct location has D
system being unable perform correct detec- not been restored, perform lo-
tion, and may cause the vehicle mark to de- cation correction and, if neces-
viate from the correct road. sary, direction correction.
E
Position correction accuracy
Enter in the road displayed on
If the accuracy of location settings is poor, the screen with an accuracy of
accuracy may be reduced when the correct approx. 1mm. F
road cannot be found, particularly in places Caution: Whenever possible,
where there are many roads. use detailed map for the correc-
tion.
G
How to cor- SEL701V
rect location Direction when location is corrected

H
If the accuracy of location settings during
correction is poor, accuracy may be re- Perform direction correction.
duced afterwards.
I
SEL702V
Location Correction by Map-Matching is Slow J

• The map-matching function needs to refer to the data of the surrounding area. It is necessary to drive some
distance for the function to work.
• Because map-matching operates on this principle, when there are many roads running in similar directions K
in the surrounding area, no matching determination may be made. The location may not be corrected until
some special feature is found.
Name of Road is Not Displayed L
The current road name may not be displayed if there are no road names displayed on the map screen.
Contents of Display Differ for Birdview™ and the (Flat) Map Screen
Difference of the BIRDVIEW™ screen from the flat map screen are as follows. M
• The current place name displays names which are primarily in the direction of vehicle travel.
• The amount of time before the vehicle travel or turn angle is updated on the screen is longer than for the
(flat) map display. AV
• The conditions for display of place names, roads, and other data are different for nearby areas and for more
distant areas.
• Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming too complex. In some cases
and in some locations, the display contents may differ. O
• The same place name, street name, etc. may be displayed multiple times.
Vehicle Mark Shows a Position Which is Completely Wrong
In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear on completely different position in the map depending on P
the GPS satellite signal receiving conditions. In this case, perform location correction and direction correction.
• When location correction has not been done
- If the receiving conditions of the GPS satellite signal is poor, if the vehicle mark becomes out of place, it may
move to a completely different location and not come back if location correction is not done. The position will
be corrected if the GPS signal can be received.
• When the vehicle has traveled by ferry, or when the vehicle has been being towed

- Because calculation of the current location cannot be done when traveling with the ignition off, for example
when traveling by ferry or when being towed, the location before travel is displayed. If the precise location
can be detected with GPS, the location will be corrected.
Vehicle Mark Jumps
In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear to jump as a result of automatic correction of the current
location.
• When map matching has been done
- If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when map matching is done, the vehicle mark may
seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to the wrong road or to a location which is not on
a road.
• When GPS location correction has been done
- If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when the location is corrected using GPS measure-
ments, the vehicle mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to a location which
is not on a road.
Vehicle Mark is in a River or Sea
The navigation system moves the vehicle mark with no distinction between land and rivers or sea. If the vehi-
cle mark is somehow out of place, it may appear that the vehicle is driving in a river or the sea.
Vehicle Mark Automatically Rotates
The system wrongly memorizes the rotating status as stopping when the ignition switch is turned ON with the
turntable rotating. That causes the vehicle mark to rotate when the vehicle is stopped.
When Driving on Same Road, Sometimes Vehicle Mark is in Right Place and Sometimes it is in Wrong Place
The conditions of the GPS antenna (GPS data) and gyroscope (angular speed sensor) change gradually.
Depending on the road traveled and the operation of the steering wheel, the location detection results will be
different. Therefore, even on a road on which the location has never been wrong, conditions may cause the
vehicle mark to deviate.

AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE)]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

AV CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000014275807
B
AWIIA2142ZZ J
1. AV control unit bracket (RH) 2. AV control unit 3. AV control unit bracket (LH)
4. AV control unit finisher (LH) 5. A/C auto amp. 6. A/C switch assembly
K
7. AV control unit finisher (RH) Front
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000014275808

L
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Before disconnecting the AV control unit and battery terminals, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait M
at least 30 seconds.
NOTE:
• Before replacing AV control unit, perform “Before Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration” to save or AV
print current vehicle specification. Refer to AV-63, "Description".
• After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the AV control unit continues operating for approximately 30 seconds.
Data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds.
O
1. Disconnect the battery. Refer to PG-109, "Battery Disconnect".
2. Remove A/C switch assembly. Refer to HAC-102, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove AV control unit screws then pull out AV control unit. P
4. Disconnect the harness connectors from AV control unit and remove.
5. Remove AV control unit bracket (LH/RH) screws and AV control unit brackets [(LH/RH) (if necessary)].
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform “After Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration” or “Manual Configuration”
when replacing AV control unit. Refer to AV-63, "Description".

AV CONTROL UNIT
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

STEERING SWITCHES
STEERING SWITCHES
A
I
AWGIA0369ZZ
1. Driver air bag module 2. Steering wheel 3. Cover J

4. Steering column cover 5. Steering wheel switches

K
REMOVAL
NOTE:
L
The steering switches are serviced as an assembly.
1. Remove steering wheel. Refer to ST-30, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screws (A) and pawls then remove steering wheel rear
M
finisher (1) from steering wheel (2).
: Pawl
AV
ALNIA1731ZZ
P

STEERING SWITCHES
3. Remove screws (A) and pawls then remove steering wheel front
: Pawl
AWNIA4073ZZ
4. Remove screws (A) and remove steering switches from steering

wheel (1).
ALNIA1733ZZ
INSTALLATION

USB INTERFACE AND AUX IN JACK
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove shift selector finisher. Refer to IP-20, "Exploded View".
2. Release pawls and remove USB interface and AUX in jack (2)
from the back of the shift selector finisher (1). C
: Pawl
D
ALNIA1729ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER
INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER (LH)

REMOVAL
1. Remove defroster grille. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from instrument panel
tweeter (LH) and remove screws (A) to remove instrument panel
tweeter [LH (1)].
(2) : Instrument panel assembly

: Front
AWNIA4124ZZ
INSTALLATION
INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER (RH)
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel tweeter grill. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from instrument panel tweeter (RH) and remove screws to remove
instrument panel tweeter.
INSTALLATION

CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
A
REMOVAL B
2. Disconnect the harness connector from center speaker (1) and
remove screws (A) to remove. C

: Front D
ALNIA1736ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

FRONT TWEETER
FRONT TWEETER
ALNIA1742ZZ
1. Door mirror corner finisher 2. Front tweeter A. Screw
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
REMOVAL
1. Remove door mirror corner finisher. Refer to MIR-21, "Exploded View".
2. Remove screws (A) and remove front tweeter (1) from door mir-
ror corner finisher (2).
ALNIA1737ZZ
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
ALNIA1743ZZ
1. Front door finisher 2. Front door speaker G
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar. H
REMOVAL I
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screws (A) and pull out front door speaker (1).
NOTE: J
ALNIA1727ZZ
M
3. Disconnect the harness connector from front door speaker and remove.
INSTALLATION
AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-30, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screws (A) then remove rear door speaker (1).
NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar.
ALNIA1684ZZ
INSTALLATION

SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
A
AWNIA4098ZZ
1. Rear subwoofer 2. Rear parcel shelf Front G
NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar. H
REMOVAL I
1. Remove the rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-41, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the rear subwoofer screws. J
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the rear subwoofer and remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. K
AV

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
ALNIA1738ZZ
1. Rear parcel shelf 2. BOSE speaker amp. bracket 3. BOSE speaker amp.
Front
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-41, "Removal and Installation".

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
2. Disconnect the harness connector (B) from the BOSE speaker
amp. (1). A
3. Remove bolts (A) then remove BOSE speaker amp.
ALNIA1745ZZ
D
4. Remove BOSE speaker amp. bracket (if necessary).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. E
AV

SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
REMOVAL
1. Lower headlining (rear). Refer to INT-48, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect harness connector (B) from antenna feeder.
3. Remove nut (A) from satellite antenna (1) and remove.
: Front
ALNIA1734ZZ
INSTALLATION
Satellite radio antenna nut : 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)

CAUTION:
If the satellite antenna nut is not tightened to the specified torque, lower sensitivity of the antenna may
be experienced. If the nut is tightened tighter than the specified torque, this will deform the roof panel.
Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000014275824
DISASSEMBLY
Insert a suitable tool into gap between satellite antenna (2) and the
cover (1) then remove the cover (1) from satellite antenna (2).
ALNIA1735ZZ
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA AMP.
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove rear pillar finisher (RH). Refer to INT-38, "REAR PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connectors (A) from the antenna amp.
(1). C
3. Remove bolt (B) and remove.
: Front
D
ALNIA1747ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

GPS ANTENNA
GPS ANTENNA
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screw to remove GPS antenna from instrument panel.
INSTALLATION

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove front room\map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-56, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from front room\map lamp
assembly (2). C
3. Release pawls and remove microphone (1).
: Pawl
D
ALNIA1691ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

Removal and Installation - Front INFOID:0000000014275828
REMOVAL
1. Remove the headlining. Refer to INT-49, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connectors (A) from the active noise
control microphones (1,2).
: Pawl
: Front
3. Release the pawls, then remove the active noise control micro-
phones (1,2) from the headlining.
CAUTION:
Carefully handle the pawls that retain the microphone to
avoid damaging.
ALNIA1776ZZ
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Check the microphone for looseness after installation.
Removal and Installation - Rear INFOID:0000000014275829
REMOVAL
1. Remove the headlining. Refer to INT-49, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from the active noise con-
trol microphone (1).
: Pawl
: Front
3. Release the pawls, then remove the active noise control micro-
phone (1) from the headlining.
CAUTION:
Carefully handle the pawls that retain the microphone to
avoid damaging. ALNIA1777ZZ
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Check the microphone for looseness after installation.

A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove shift selector finisher. Refer to IP-20, "Exploded View"
2. Disconnect the harness connector (B) from the multifunction
switch (1). C
3. Remove screws (A) and remove multifunction switch (1) from
the shift selector finisher (2).
D
ALNIA1780ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE)]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
WARNING:
nance and repair be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
see the SR section.
ness connectors.
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
CAUTION:
after turning the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:

• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000014275837

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE)]
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).] A
PKIA0306E
D
twisted line will be lost.) E
G
PKIA0307E

H
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component I
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip. J
• Follow the steps below to clean components: K
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth. L
- Oily dirt:
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off. M
- For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner. AV

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE)]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(TechMate No.)
Tool name
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

PIIB1407E

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE)]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
COMPONENT PARTS
B
AV
P
AWNIA4106ZZ
A. View of instrument panel lower console B. View of overhead console

COMPONENT PARTS
No. Component Function

1. Rear speaker RH Refer to AV-187, "Speakers".
2. Antenna amp.
Refer to AV-189, "Antennas, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder".
3. Satellite antenna
4. Rear door speaker RH
5. Front door speaker RH Refer to AV-187, "Speakers".
6. Tweeter RH
7. GPS antenna Refer to AV-189, "Antennas, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder".
8. Tweeter LH Refer to AV-187, "Speakers".
10. Front door speaker RH Refer to AV-187, "Speakers".
11. Steering switches Refer to AV-189, "Steering Switches".
12. Multifunction switch Refer to AV-188, "Multifunction Switch".
13. Rear door speaker LH
Refer to AV-187, "Speakers".
14. Rear speaker LH
15. USB interface-1
16. USB interface-2 Refer to AV-189, "USB Interfaces and AUX In Jack".
17. AUX in jack
18. Microphone Refer to AV-189, "Microphone (Hands-free Phone/Voice Recognition)".
AV Control Unit INFOID:0000000014275842

• AV control unit controls the audio system of Multi AV system.
communication.
ALNIA1763ZZ
Speakers INFOID:0000000014275843
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

• 6 x 9 in (15.2 x 22.9 cm) speakers are installed in the front side
bottom of the front doors.
sounds.
ALNIA1765ZZ
TWEETER

COMPONENT PARTS
• 2 in (5.01 cm) speakers are installed in the top corners of the
instrument panel. A
• Sound signals generated by the AV control unit output high range
sounds.
B
ALNIA1840ZZ
D
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
• 4 in (10.2 cm) speakers are installed in the front side center of the
rear doors.
• Sound signals generated by the AV control unit output mid range E
sounds.
G
JSNIA5958ZZ
REAR SPEAKER H
• 6 x 9 in (15.2 x 22.9 cm) speakers are installed in the top of the
rear parcel shelf.
sounds. I
K
ALNIA1765ZZ
Multifunction Switch INFOID:0000000014275844
L
• Multifunction switch is located on the center console.
• The multifunction switch allows for navigation of the following func-
tions of the AV control unit:
M
- Audio
- Phone
- Info
- MENU AV
- Map
- Navi
- Settings O
JSNIA6001ZZ

COMPONENT PARTS
Steering Switches INFOID:0000000014275845
• Hands-free phone, navigation, and audio operations can be per-

formed.
• This switch is connected to combination meter, and switch opera-
tion signal is transmitted to combination meter.
• Combination meter transmits steering switch signal to AV control
unit via AV communication.
AWNIA4088ZZ
USB Interfaces and AUX In Jack INFOID:0000000014275846
• The USB interface and AUX in jack is located in the lower instru-
ment panel console box.
• The components of the USB interface and AUX in jack are the
USB interface-1, USB interface-2 and AUX in jack.
• iPod® and USB memory can be connected to the AV control unit
through the USB interfaces.
• An external audio device can be connected to the AV control unit
through the AUX in jack.
ALNIA1764ZZ
Microphone (Hands-free Phone/Voice Recognition) INFOID:0000000014275847
• The microphone is installed on the map lamp assembly.

• The microphone transmits sound signals to the AV control unit dur-
ing hands-free phone communication and voice recognition.
JSNIA6009ZZ
Antennas, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder INFOID:0000000014275848
GPS ANTENNA
• GPS antenna is installed in the instrument panel.
• The antenna amplifies radio waves received from the GPS satellite
and transmits the GPS signal to the AV control unit.
NOTE:
An object on the instrument panel may cause the reception sensitiv-
ity to be decreased.
JSNIA5132ZZ
SATELLITE ANTENNA

COMPONENT PARTS
• Satellite radio antenna is installed to the rear center of the roof.
• Receives satellite radio waves and outputs them to AV control unit. A
AWNIA4089ZZ
D
ANTENNA AMP. AND RADIO ANTENNA
• Antenna amp. is located on the passenger side inner C-pillar.
G
AWNIA4087ZZ
H
• AM/FM radio main antenna and FM radio sub antenna are located in the rear window glass.
• The AM/FM radio main antenna path has an antenna amp. to obtain sufficient reception power.
JSNIA4204GB
L
CAUTION:
Affixing any mirror-type window films or metallic items (e.g. commercial antenna) on the rear window
glass causes a reduction in the radio receiver sensitivity. M
ANTENNA FEEDER
AV

COMPONENT PARTS
AWNIA4428ZZ
1. R203 2. R202 3. Antenna amp.

4. R204, R205 5. R206 6. R200, R201, M198, M199
7. M166 8. M165 9. M167

SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
AWNIA4434GB
AUDIO SYSTEM K
The audio system consists of the following components:
• AV control unit
• Steering switches L
• Tweeters
• Rear speakers M
• AM/FM antenna and antenna amp.
• Glass antenna (FM sub)
When the audio system is on, radio signals received by the AM/FM antenna are amplified by the antenna amp. AV
The amplified AM/FM antenna and glass antenna (FM sub) radio signals are sent to the AV control unit. The
AV control unit sends audio signals to the speakers and tweeters.
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
O
SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM
The satellite radio system consists of the following components:
• Satellite antenna P
• AV control unit
When the satellite radio system is on, radio signals are supplied to the AV control unit from the satellite
antenna. The AV control unit then sends audio signals to the speakers and tweeters.
Refer to Owner's Manual for satellite radio system operating instructions.
USB INTERFACE
• USB interface 1 and 2 are located in the lower instrument panel console box.

SYSTEM
• When iPod® or USB memory is connected to the USB port, the USB interface transmits the music data and
text data in iPod® or USB memory device to the AV control unit via USB communication.
• The AV control unit transmits the sound signal to each speaker.
• When AV control unit receives the text data from USB interface, it displays the text data (artist, album, and
song title) on the AV control unit display.
AUX
• Auxiliary input jack is located in the lower instrument panel console box.
• Auxiliary input jack consist of the sound input terminal.
• When sound data is input into the sound input terminal, the AUX in jack transmits the AUX sound signal to
the AV control unit.
• When AV control unit receives the AUX in jack sound signal, it transmits the sound signal to each speaker.
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
System Operation
NOTE:
Cellular telephones must have their wireless connection set up (paired) before using the Bluetooth® telephone
system.
The Bluetooth® telephone system allows users who have a Bluetooth® cellular telephone to make a wireless
connection between their cellular telephone and the AV control unit. Hands-free cellular telephone calls can be
sent and received. Some Bluetooth® cellular telephones may not be recognized by the AV control unit. When
a cellular telephone or the AV control unit is replaced, the telephone must be paired with the AV control unit.
Different cellular telephones may have different pairing procedures, refer to the cellular telephone operating
manual.
Refer to the Owner's Manual for Bluetooth® telephone system operating instructions.
AV Control Unit
When the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, the AV control unit will power up. During power up, the AV
control unit is initialized and performs various self-checks. Initialization may take up to 20 seconds. If a phone
is present in the vehicle and paired with the AV control unit, Voice Recognition will then become active.
Steering Switches
When buttons on the steering switch are pushed, the resistance in steering switch circuit changes, depending
on which button is pushed. The AV control unit uses this signal to perform various functions while navigating
through the voice recognition system.
The following functions can be performed using the steering switch:
• Initiate self-diagnosis of the Bluetooth® telephone system
• Start a voice recognition session
• Answer and end telephone calls
• Adjust the volume of calls
• Record memos
Microphone
The microphone is located in the roof console assembly. The microphone sends a signal to the AV control unit.
The microphone can be actively tested during self-diagnosis.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Operation
NOTE:
Refer to NAVI System Owner's Manual for system operation.
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current position according to the following three
signals: Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor, turning angle of the vehicle
as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor), and the direction of vehicle travel as determined by
the GPS antenna (GPS information).
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the calculated vehicle position with map data
read from the map data, which is stored in the hard disk drive (HDD) (map-matching), and indicated on the
screen with a current-location mark.

SYSTEM
By comparing the vehicle position detection results found by the
GPS and by map-matching, more accurate vehicle position data can A
be used.
The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the dis-
tance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its
B
direction.
SEL684V
D
Travel Distance
Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed input signal. Therefore, the calculation may
become incorrect as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance fine adjustment function has
been adopted. E
Travel Direction
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS
antenna (GPS information). As the gyroscope and GPS antenna have both merit and demerit, input signals F
from them are prioritized in each situation. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with more
detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is detected more accurately.
G
Type Advantage Disadvantage
• Direction errors may accumulate when the ve-
• Can detect the vehicle's turning angle quite
Gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) hicle is driven for long distances without stop- H
accurately.
ping.
• Can detect the vehicle's travel direction • Correct direction cannot be detected when the
GPS antenna (GPS information)
(North/South/East/West). vehicle speed is low. I
Map–Matching
Map–matching is a function that repositions the vehicle on the road
map when a new location is judged to be the most accurate. This is J
done by comparing the current vehicle position, calculated by the
method described in the position detection principle, with the road
map data around the vehicle, read from the map data stored on the
K
HDD.
Therefore, the vehicle position may not be corrected after the vehicle
is driven over a certain distance or time in which GPS information is
hard to receive. In this case, the current-location mark on the display L
must be corrected manually.
CAUTION:
SEL685V
The road map data is based on data stored on the HDD. M
• In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will be
shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is cur-
rently driven has been judged and the current-location mark has
been repositioned. AV
If there is an error in distance and/or direction, the alternative
routes will be shown in different order of priority, and the wrong
road can be avoided. O
If two roads are running in parallel, they are of the same priority.
Therefore, the current-location mark may appear on either of them
alternately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and
configuration of the road. P
SEL686V

SYSTEM
• Map-matching does not function correctly when the road on which
the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded on the HDD, or when
the road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road pattern
are different due to repair.
When driving on a road not present in the map, the map-matching
function may find another road and position the current-location
mark on it. Then, when the correct road is detected, the current-
location mark may leap to it.
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direc-
tion calculated by the distance and direction with the road data
read from the HDD is limited. Therefore, when there is an exces-
ALNIA0671GB
sive gap between the current vehicle position and the position on
the map, correction by map-matching is not possible.
GPS (Global Positioning System)
GPS (Global Positioning System) has been developed and con-
trolled by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS
satellite (NAVSTAR), sending out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at the height of approx. 21,000 km (13,000 mi).
The GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in three dimen-
sions (latitude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the
radio waves received from four or more GPS satellites (three-dimen-
sional positioning). If radio waves were received only from three
GPS satellites, the GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in
two dimensions (latitude/longitude), utilizing the altitude data calcu-
lated previously by using radio waves from four or more GPS satel-
SEL526V
lites (two-dimensional positioning).
Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions:
• In two-dimensional positioning, the GPS accuracy will deteriorate when the altitude of the vehicle position
changes.
• There may be an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft.) in position detected by three-dimensional positioning,
which is more accurate than two-dimensional positioning. The accuracy can be even lower depending on the
arrangement of the GPS satellites utilized for the positioning.
• Position detection is not possible when the vehicle is in an area where radio waves from the GPS satellite do
not reach, such as in a tunnel, parking lot in a building, and under an elevated highway. Radio waves from
the GPS satellites may not be received when some object is located over the GPS antenna.
• Position correction by GPS is not available while the vehicle is stopped.

A
AV control unit on board diagnosis performs the following functions listed in the table below: B
Mode Description
• AV control unit diagnosis. C
meter).
Self Diagnosis
- between Control Unit (AV control unit) and IT-Commander (multifunc- D
tion switch).
E
Display Diagnosis • Touch Panel: F
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake, G
Vehicle Signals
H
AV COMM Diagnosis The communication condition of system components can be monitored. I
• ### Voice Microphone Test. J
sanConnect Services
• Maintenance.
Confirmation/Adjustment The following functions are available: K

Camera
L
• Factory Configuration Data Initialization. M
AV
Speaker Test
tones.
• Status. O
• Active Test.
P
display anything.

On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000014275851
METHOD OF STARTING
3. Press and hold the MENU button.
ALNIA1766ZZ
least 7 clicks, right at least 7 clicks and left again at least 7
clicks.
ALNIA1767ZZ
be selected.
SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Select Self Diagnosis.
diagnosis.

Normal Green Green
1 Red Green
Unit malfunction
unit internal error. Refer to AV-280, "Removal and Installation".

Only Unit Part Is Displayed In Red A

circuits. Refer to AV-249, "AV CONTROL B
place AV control unit. Refer to AV-280, C
ground circuits. Refer to MWI-59, "COM- D
Cluster
tion meter power supply and ground cir- E
• Multifunction switch power supply and F
IT-Commander
switch power supply and ground circuits. • If no malfunction is detected in multifunc- G
H

I

functioning. AV communication circuits. Refer to AV-
J
AV communication circuits between combi- 245, "DTC Description".
functioning. K
GPS antenna connection malfunction is de- GPS antenna connector disconnected. Re- L

1. Select Confirmation/Adjustment. M
2. Select an available option on the Confirmation/Adjustment screen to display the relevant diagnosis or
AV
CONSULT FUNCTIONS O

P
Work support The settings for AV control unit functions can be changed.

Configuration
• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of AV communication is displayed.
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit] Description

line.
PKB SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of park brake signal.
WORK SUPPORT
formed.
CONFIGURATION

AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE)]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

AV CONTROL UNIT
B

C
VHCL SPD SIG
Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH). On D
ILLUM SIG
E
IGN SIG
Selector lever in any position other than R. Off F
REV SIG
TERMINAL LAYOUT
G
L
AWNIA4127ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
M
AV

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Sound signal front LH Output
SKIB3609E
Sound signal rear LH Output
(LG) (Y) • Sound output
SKIB3609E
7
(P)
9 8
(R) (GR)
Sound signal front RH Output
(P) (SB) • Sound output
SKIB3609E
Sound signal rear RH Output
SKIB3609E
19
(G)
21 Input/
(LG) output
22 Input/
(SB) output
23 Input/
(LG) output
24 Input/
(SB) output
25 Input/
— CAN low — —
(P) output
26 Input/
(L) output

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
NOTE: B
(destination unit).
C
Ignition switch ON
(BG) pulse)
km/h (25 MPH)
D
JSNIA0012GB
E
30 —
(G) 0V
than R (reverse)
F
31
(BG)
32 G
(P)
— Output — —
(LG) tion output
H
46 48
I
Microphone signal Input While speaking into the microphone
(W) (Shield)
J
SKIB3609E
47
— Microphone power supply — — 5.0 V
(B) K
L
Input
M
SKIB3609E
AV

Input
O
SKIB3609E
52 P
(Shield)
57
(R)

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Camera image signal Input
(W) (B) • Image is displayed.
SKIB0827E
60
(Shield)
61
(B)
63
(G)
64
(W)
65
(R)
66
(Shield)
67 AV control unit ON
Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Output Battery voltage
(B) • FM-AM selected
68
— AM-FM main Input — —
(B)
69
— AM-FM ground — — —
(Shield)
70
— FM sub Input — —
(B)
71
— FM sub ground — — —
(Shield)
Ignition switch ON
Ground Input • Satellite antenna connector discon- 5.0 V
(B) signal
nected
— — — —
(Shield) shield
Ignition switch ON
74
Ground GPS antenna signal Input • GPS antenna connector discon- 5.0 V
(B)
nected
75
— GPS antenna shield — — —
(Shield)
76
(B)
78
(G)
79
(W)
80
(R)
81
(Shield)

AV CONTROL UNIT
A
B
1 U12AA: CONFIGURATION ERROR
2
• U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT C
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT(CAN)
3 • U1267: METER CONN
• U121F: DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT D
4 • U1300: AV COMM CIRCUIT
• U1310: CONTROL UNIT(AV)
• U1232: ST ANGLE SEN CALIB E
• U1244: GPS ANTENNA CONN
• U1258: XM ANTENNA CONN
5 • U1263: USB OVERCURRENT
• U12B7: USB CONN F
• U12BA: MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH CONN
• U12BE: RADIO ANTENNA CONN
DTC Index INFOID:0000000014275855 G
DTC Display item Refer to H

U1010 CONTROL UNIT(CAN) AV-229, "DTC Description"
U121F DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT AV-231, "DTC Description" I
U1244 GPS ANTENNA CONN AV-233, "DTC Description"
J
U1258 XM ANTENNA CONN AV-234, "DTC Description"
U1263 USB OVERCURRENT AV-236, "DTC Description"
U1267 METER CONN AV-237, "DTC Description" K
U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR AV-239, "DTC Description"
U12B7 USB CONN AV-240, "DTC Description"
L
U12BA MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH CONN AV-241, "DTC Description"
U12BE RADIO ANTENNA CONN AV-243, "DTC Description"
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT AV-245, "DTC Description" M
U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV) AV-248, "DTC Description"
AV

MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE)]
WIRING DIAGRAM
ABNWA3260GB

AV
ABNWA3266GB

AANWA1381GB

AV
ABNIA9684GB

ABNIA9685GB

AV
ABNIA9686GB

ABNIA9687GB

AV
ABNIA9688GB

ABNIA9689GB

AV
ABNIA9690GB

ABNIA9691GB

AV
ABNIA9692GB

ABNIA9693GB

AV
ABNIA9694GB

ABNIA9695GB

< BASIC INSPECTION > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE)]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
JSNIA4482GB M

• Reference 2: Refer to AV-204, "DTC Index". AV
DETAILED FLOW
O
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc- P
tion occurred).
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect CONSULT and perform a "Self Diagnostic Result" for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-198, "CONSULT
Function".
NOTE:
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
1. Check the DTC indicated in the “Self Diagnostic Result”.
>> GO TO 5.
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-267, "Symptom
Table".
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
2. Perform a "Self Diagnostic Result" for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT.
NOTE:
has been indicated in the “Self Diagnosic Result”.
YES >> GO TO 1.

A
BEFORE REPLACEMENT B
When replacing AV control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before
replacement.
NOTE: C
AFTER REPLACEMENT D
CAUTION:
When replacing AV control unit, always perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with CONSULT.
• Complete the procedure of “WRITE CONFIGURATION” in order.
E
• If you set incorrect “WRITE CONFIGURATION”, incidents might occur.
F
1.WRITE DOWN THE REGISTRATION CODE FROM THE NEW / REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT
On the replacement AV control unit’s label, locate and write down the G
registration code (1).
>> GO TO 2. H
AWNIA4080ZZ J
2.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
CONSULT Configuration K
tion".
NOTE:
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” after L
>> GO TO 3. M
3.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT

Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-280, "Removal and Installation". AV
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT’S CONFIGURATION. O
1. Place the radio into Self Diagnostic mode. Refer to AV-197, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
2. Select “Confirmation/Adjustment”.
3. Select “Version Information”. P
4. If the “ITM Configuration Part Number” matches the “ITM Part Number”, GO TO 5.
5. If the “ITM Configuration Part Number” does not match the “ITM Part Number”, perform the “Factory Con-
figuration Data Initialization” from the “Reset Settings” menu under “Confirmation/Adjustment” to clear the
factory configuration data.
>> GO TO 5.

5.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)

Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file” or “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” to write
vehicle specification. Refer to AV-224, "Work Procedure".
>> GO TO 6.
6.CLEAR DTC’S AND CHECK AV SYSTEM OPERATION.
1. Perform a “ Self Diagnostic Result” for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT.
2. Clear any DTC’s in Multi AV.
3. Verify operation of Multi AV system.
>> GO TO 7.
7.REGISTER THE REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT.
Perform AV control unit registration. Refer to AV-226, "Work Procedure".
>> Work End.

A
Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing AV control B
unit.
Configuration has three functions as follows.
Function Description C
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit.
Before Replace ECU
Read / Write Configuration • Saves the read vehicle configuration.
D
After Replace ECU Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.
Manual Configuration Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
NOTE: E
Manual setting item: Items which need selection by vehicle specifications
Automatic setting item: Items which are written in automatically (Setting cannot be changed)
For some models and specifications, the automatic setting item may not be displayed.
CAUTION: F
When replacing AV control unit, always perform “Re/programming, Configuration” with CONSULT. If
not performed, AV control unit will not operate normally.
• Complete the procedure of “Read / Write Configuration” in order. G
• Never perform “Read / Write Configuration” except for new AV control unit.
• If you set incorrect “Read / Write Configuration”, the AV control unit may not operate properly.
H
1.WRITING MODE SELECTION I

Select “Re/programming, Configuration” of MULTI AV.
J
2.PERFORM “AFTER REPLACE ECU” OF “READ / WRITE CONFIGURATION” K
Perform “After Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration”. L
>> WORK END

3.PERFORM “MANUAL CONFIGURATION” M
1. Select “Manual Configuration”. AV
2. Identify the correct model and configuration list. Refer to AV-225, "Configuration list".
3. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item.
CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally O
if the setting is not correct.
NOTE:
If items are not displayed, touch “Next”. Refer to AV-225, "Configuration list" for written items and setting P
value.
4. Touch “Next”.
5. Touch “OK”.
CAUTION:
Make sure to select “OK” even if the indicated configuration of brand new AV control unit is the
same as the desired configuration. If “OK” is not selected, configuration will not be complete.
6. Check that the configuration has been successfully written and touch “End”.

>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
Confirm that the AV control unit operates normally.
>> WORK END

Configuration list INFOID:0000000014275862
CAUTION:
• Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally if
the setting is not correct.
• The “setting value” of this vehicle is as follows: Never select any other value than the setting value
shown below. (If there is only 1 item in “setting value” that means that item is the only choice for this
certain vehicle.)
SETTING ITEM
NOTE
Items Setting value
Without around view monitor system or rear view monitor sys-
NONE/AVM
tem
CAMERA SYSTEM
REAR With rear view monitor system
AVM With around view monitor system
BASE Without BOSE audio system
SOUND SYSTEM
BOSE With BOSE audio system
WITH With telematics system
TELEMATICS
WITHOUT Without telematics system
FRONT&REAR With front and rear sonar
SONAR TYPE
NONE Without front and rear sonar

A
AFTER REPLACEMENT B
If the AV control unit is replaced with a new AV control unit, the new AV control unit must be registered using
the registration code.
CAUTION: C
If the new AV control unit registration code is not registered, the “APPS” mode will not function.
D
1.RECORD REGISTRATION CODE FOR REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT
1. Refer to the replacement AV control unit’s label located on the top of the AV control unit.
2. Locate the registration code (1) on the AV control unit’s label. E
AWNIA4080ZZ
3. Record the registration code. I
>> GO TO 2. J
2.REGISTER REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT
Register the replacement AV control unit by contacting NISSAN Owner Services. Refer to TSB. K
>> GO TO 3.
3.OPERATION CHECK L
Verify that the AV control unit “APPS” function operates normally.

M
>> Work End.
AV

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE)]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
DESCRIPTION
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CAN COMM CIRCUIT Signal (terminal) –

U1000
(CAN COMM CIRCUIT) Threshold –
POSSIBLE CAUSE
FAIL-SAFE
—
If DTC U1000 is displayed with DTC U1310, first perform the confirmation procedure (trouble diagnosis) for
DTC U1310.
YES >> Refer to AV-248, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
CONSULT
5. Check DTC.

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.

4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more. A
6. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1000 detected again? B
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagno-
sis Flow Chart".
C
AV

DESCRIPTION
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONTROL UNIT (CAN) Signal (terminal) -

U1010
[Control unit (CAN)] Threshold -
POSSIBLE CAUSE
FAIL-SAFE
—
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
5. Check DTC.

NO >> Inspection End. A
AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT Signal (terminal) —

U121F
(Display Control Unit) Threshold AV control unit internal malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
With CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
1.CHECK CONNECTION STATUS OF AV CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR

Check the AV control unit connectors for proper connection, damage and disconnected or loose terminals.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR SD CARD POOR CONNECTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait 30 seconds or more.
2. Remove and re-insert the SD card.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON and wait for 30 seconds or more.
4. Check self-diagnosis results of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.

A

ST ANGLE SEN CALIB Signal (terminal) –

U1232
(Steering angle sensor calibration) Threshold – D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
FAIL-SAFE F
—
G
CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
1.ADJUST NEUTRAL POSITION OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

L
Adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position. Refer to BRC-67, "Work Procedure" (VDC/TCS/ABS) or
BRC-253, "Work Procedure" (FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING).
NOTE:
When U1232 is detected, adjust the predictive course line center position of the steering angle sensor. M
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN AV
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. O
5. Check DTC. P

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

GPS ANTENNA CONN Signal (terminal) –

U1244
(GPS antenna connection error) Threshold –
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• GPS antenna is not connected
• GPS antenna
FAIL-SAFE
—
5. Check DTC.
1.CHECK GPS ANTENNA HARNESS CONNECTOR

2. Visually check GPS antenna connection.
YES >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-291, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair connection of GPS antenna.

A


Satellite radio antenna circuit is short to D
Signal (terminal)
ground (terminal 72)
1
Threshold
ground
XM ANTENNA CONN E
U1258 (Satellite radio antenna connection Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
error) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Satellite antenna signal is open (terminal F
Signal (terminal)
2 72)
Threshold Satellite radio antenna circuit is open
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Satellite radio antenna is disconnected H
• Harness or connector (Satellite radio antenna circuit is open or short)
FAIL-SAFE
— I
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE J
CONSULT
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds. K
5. Check DTC. L
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". M
AV

O
1.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA CONNECTOR

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P
2. Visually inspect the satellite radio antenna and antenna feeder.
YES >> GO TO 2.


Ground
M166 72 (—) 5.0 V

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M166 and satellite antenna connector.
3. Check the continuity between AV control unit connector M166 and satellite antenna connector R206.
AV control unit Satellite antenna

Continuity
M166 72 R206 1 Yes
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M166 72 — No
YES >> Replace satellite radio antenna. Refer to AV-289, "Removal and Installation".

U1263 USB
U1263 USB
A

USB OVERCURRENT Signal (terminal) –
U1263 (Overcurrent in USB harness is de-
Threshold – D
tected)
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
FAIL-SAFE
— F

CONSULT
5. Check DTC. I
K
1.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESSES
Visually inspect USB interface harnesses. Refer to AV-284, "Removal and Installation".
L
YES >> GO TO 2.
M
2.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS CIRCUITS
Check USB interface harness circuits. Refer to AV-264, "Diagnosis Procedure".
O

U1267 METER CONN
U1267 METER CONN
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

METER CONN AV communication circuits (terminals 23

Signal (terminal)
U1267 (Combination meter connection er- and 24)
ror) Threshold –
NOTE:
DTC U1267 is displayed with DTC U1300.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Combination meter
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check combination meter power supply and ground circuit. Refer to MWI-59, "COMBINATION METER : Diag-
nosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M163 and combination meter connector M23.
3. Check the continuity between AV control unit connector M163 and combination meter connector M23.

U1267 METER CONN
AV control unit Combination meter A

Continuity
23 49
M163 M23 Yes B
24 50
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-77, "Removal and Installation". C
AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONFIGURATION ERROR Signal (terminal) –

U12AA
(AV control unit configuration) Threshold –
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Configuration procedure not performed
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12AA detected?
1.PERFORM CONFIGURATION
Perform configuration procedure. Refer to AV-224, "Work Procedure".
Was configuration procedure successful?

U12B7 USB CONN
U12B7 USB CONN
A

USB CONN Signal (terminal) –

U12B7
(USB connection error) Threshold – D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• AV control unit
• USB harness is not connected
FAIL-SAFE F
—
G
CONSULT
4. Connect audio apparatuses, etc., to USB port. I
6. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12B7 detected? J
K
1.CHECK DTC (1) L

CONSULT
1. Remove connected audio apparatus from USB port.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds. M
4. Erase DTC.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds. AV
7. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “MULTI AV”.
Is any DTC detected?
O
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC (2) P
1. Connect audio apparatus to USB port again.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”.
YES >> Abnormality of audio apparatus connected to USB port.

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONN Signal (terminal) –
U12BA
(Multifunction switch connection Threshold –
error)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Multifunction switch
• Multifunction switch is not connected
FAIL-SAFE
—
With CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12BA detected?
1.CHECK MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH POWER AND GROUND

Check the multifunction switch power and ground circuits. Refer to AV-250, "MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH :
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AV COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS
function switch connector and Bose speaker amp. connector B149.

AV control unit Multifunction switch A

Continuity
23 4
M162 M259 Yes B
24 3
C
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
D
23
M162 — No
24
YES >> Replace multifunction switch. Refer to AV-293, "Removal and Installation".
F
AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


Radio antenna signal is shorted to ground
Signal (terminal)
1 (terminal 68)
Threshold –
RADIO ANTENNA CONN Diagnosis delay time 2 seconds or more

U12BE
(Radio antenna connection error) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Radio antenna signal is open (terminal
Signal (terminal)
2 68)
Threshold –
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Radio antenna is not connected
• Harness or connector (Radio antenna circuit is open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12BE detected?
1.CHECK WINDOW ANTENNA HARNESS CONNECTOR

2. Visually inspect the radio antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-189, "Antennas, Antenna Amp. and
Antenna Feeder".
YES >> GO TO 2.
A
(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−)
(Approx.) B
Connector Terminal
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ANTENNA HARNESS CIRCUIT D
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M165 and antenna amp. connector.

2. Check the continuity between AV control unit connector M165 and antenna amp. connector R202.
E
AV control unit Antenna amp. Continuity

F
M165 68 R202 2 Yes
3. Check the continuity AV control unit connector M165 and ground.
G
AV control unit Continuity
Connector Terminal
H
M165 68 Ground No
YES >> Replace antenna. Refer to GW-27, "Removal and Installation". I
AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


AV communication circuits are short to
Signal (terminal)
1 ground (terminals 21, 22, 23, and 24)
Threshold –
AV COMM CIRCUIT Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

U1300
(AV comm circuit error) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
AV communication circuits are open (ter-
Signal (terminal)
2 minals 21, 22, 23, and 24)
Threshold –
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector (AV comm circuits are open or short)
FAIL SAFE
—
CONSULT
5. Check DTC.
1.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION LOW CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M163, data link connector, combination meter connector M23 and
multifunction switch connector.

Continuity
21
M162 M22 3 Yes
23

A
Continuity
B
21
M162 M23 49 Yes
23
5. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M162 and multifunction switch connector M259. C

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal D
21
M162 M259 4 Yes
23
E
AV control unit F
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
21
M162 — No G
23
YES >> GO TO 2. H
2.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION HIGH CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M162 and data link connector M22. I

Continuity J
22
M162 M22 11 Yes
24 K
L
Continuity
22 M
M162 M23 50 Yes
24
AV
Continuity
O
22
M162 M259 3 Yes
24
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M162 and ground. P
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
22
M162 — No
24

YES >> Replace the AV control unit. Refer to AV-280, "Removal and Installation".

A

CONTROL UNIT (AV) Signal (terminal) –

U1310
(AV control unit initialization error) Threshold – D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
AV control unit
FAIL SAFE
— F

CONSULT
5. Check DTC. I
AV

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000014275892
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 15 20 A
Ignition switch ON or START 30 10 A
Is a fuse blown?
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT BATTERY POWER SUPPLY

Ground

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY

Ground

YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT IGNITION POWER SUPPLY


A
Ground

B
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. C
5.CHECK CASE GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Check the continuity between AV control unit case and ground. D
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. E
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000014275893 F
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-205, "Wiring Diagram". G
1.CHECK FUSE H
2. Check that the following fuse is not blown:
I
J
Is the fuse blown?
NO >> GO TO 2.
K
2.CHECK MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY
2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector. L
3. Check the voltage between multifunction switch connector M259 and ground.
Multifunction switch Voltage M

Ground

AV
YES >> GO TO 2.
O
3.CHECK MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Check the continuity between multifunction switch connector M259 and ground. P
Multifunction switch
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M259 2 — Yes

TWEETER
TWEETER
A
B
C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit and tweeter connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY F
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M160 and suspect tweeter connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M160 and suspect tweeter connector.
G
AV control unit Tweeter
Continuity
H
2 1
M143 (LH)
3 2
M160 Yes
11 1 I
M144 (RH)
12 2
J
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
2
3
M160 — No L
11
12
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TWEETER SIGNAL AV
1. Connect AV control unit connector M160 and suspect tweeter connector.
AV control unit connector M160 P

Terminal Terminal

TWEETER
2 3
Audio signal output

11 12
SKIB3609E


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
B
C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit and front door speaker connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY F
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M160 and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M160 and suspect front door speaker connector.
G
AV control unit Front door speaker
Continuity
H
2 1
D3 (LH)
3 2
B160 Yes
11 1 I
D103 (RH)
12 2
J
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
2
3
B160 — No L
11
12
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL AV
1. Connect AV control unit connector M160 and suspect front door speaker connector.

Terminal Terminal

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
2 3
Audio signal output

11 12
SKIB3609E


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
B
C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit and rear door speaker connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY F
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M160 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M160 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
G
AV control unit Rear door speaker
Continuity
H
4 1
D202 (LH)
5 2
B160 Yes
13 1 I
D302 (RH)
14 2
J
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
4
5
B160 — No L
13
14
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL AV
1. Connect AV control unit connector M160 and suspect rear door speaker connector.

Terminal Terminal

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
4 5
Audio signal output

13 14
SKIB3609E


REAR SPEAKER
REAR SPEAKER
A
B
C
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit and rear speaker connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY F
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M160 and suspect rear speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M160 and suspect rear speaker connector.
G
AV control unit Rear speaker
Continuity
H
4 1
B73 (LH)
5 2
B160 Yes
13 1 I
B72 (RH)
14 2
J
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
4
5
B160 — No L
13
14
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL AV
1. Connect AV control unit connector M160 and suspect rear speaker connector.

Terminal Terminal

REAR SPEAKER
4 5
Audio signal output

13 14
SKIB3609E

YES >> Replace rear speaker. Refer to AV-288, "Removal and Installation".

A
B
C
1.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL
2. Check the signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M161. D

(+) (−) Condition Reference value E
Terminal

G
PKIB5037J
H
NO >> GO TO 2. I
2.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE VCC
2. Disconnect microphone connector. J
4. Check the voltage between the terminals of microphone connector R22.
K
Microphone connector R22
Voltage
(+) (−)
(Approx.) L
Terminal
4 2 5.0 V
YES >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-292, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MICROPHONE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AV
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and microphone connector R22. O
AV control unit Microphone

Continuity P
46 1
M161 47 R22 4 Yes
48 2
YES >> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK MICROPHONE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Check the continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and ground.
(+)
AV control unit (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal
46
M161 Ground No
47

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
A
B
1.CHECK STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH RESISTANCE

D
2. Disconnect combination switch connector M149.
3. Check resistance between combination switch connector terminals.
E
Combination switch connector M149 Resistance Ω
Condition
Terminal Terminal (Approx.)
F
Depress SOURCE switch. 1
Depress switch. 121
16 321 G
Depress switch.
Depress switch. 723
Depress OK switch. 2023 H

19
Depress switch. 1
Depress switch. 121 I

17
Depress switch. 321
Depress DISP BACK switch. 723 J

Depress DISP switch. 2023
K
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace steering switches. Refer to AV-282, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND COMBINATION METER L
1. Disconnect combination meter connector M24 and combination switch connector M30.
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and combination switch connector M30.
M
Combination meter Combination switch
Continuity
21 11 AV
M24 22 M30 9 Yes
23 8
O
Combination meter P
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
21
M24 22 — No
23

STEERING SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH
Check continuity between combination switch connectors M30 and M149.
Combination switch
Continuity
8 17
M30 9 M149 16 Yes
11 19
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-16, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND AV CONTROL UNIT
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M23 and AV control unit connector M161.
Combination meter AV control unit

Continuity
49 23
M23 M161 Yes
50 24
Combination meter
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
M23 — No
50

USB INTERFACE
USB INTERFACE
A
B
USB INTERFACE-1 C
1.CHECK USB INTERFACE-1 HARNESS CONTINUITY
E
Continuity
61 1 F
63 3
M164 64 M190 4 Yes
G
65 5
66 6
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M164 and ground. H
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal I
61
M164 — No
64
J
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. K
USB INTERFACE-2
1.CHECK USB INTERFACE-2 HARNESS CONTINUITY L

M

Continuity AV
76 1
78 3 O
M157 79 M191 4 Yes
80 5
P
81 6

USB INTERFACE
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
76
M157 — No
79

AUX IN JACK
AUX IN JACK
A
B
C
1.CHECK AUX IN JACK HARNESS CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M161 and AUX in jack connector. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and AUX in jack connector M172.
AV control unit AUX in jack E

Continuity
49 1
F
M161 50 M172 4 Yes
51 3
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M161 and ground. G
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal H
49
M161 — No
50
I
YES >> Replace the AUX in jack. Refer to AV-284, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. J
AV

MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE)]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
MULTI AV SYSTEM
RELATED TO AUDIO

The disk cannot be removed. AV control unit Refer to AV-197, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".
• Speaker circuit shorted to ground.
Refer to AV-205, "Wiring Diagram".
No sound from all speakers.
circuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-249, "AV CONTROL UNIT :
AV control unit and speaker.
Refer to:
er).
door speaker).
No sound comes out or the level of the - AV-256, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear
sound is low. door speaker).
Only a certain speaker (tweeter LH, tweeter - AV-258, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear
RH, front door speaker LH, front door speaker).
speaker RH, rear door speaker LH, rear • Malfunction in speaker.
door speaker RH, rear speaker LH and rear Refer to:
speaker RH) does not output sound. - AV-285, "Removal and Installation"
(tweeter).
door speaker).
door speaker).
speaker).
Function".

MULTI AV SYSTEM
A
Noise comes out from all speakers. Refer to AV-197, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".
• Poor connector connection of speaker. B
AV control unit and speaker.
Refer to:
C
er).
door speaker). D
door speaker).
Noise comes out only from a certain speak- - AV-258, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear
er (tweeter LH, tweeter RH, front door speaker). E
speaker LH, front door speaker RH, rear • Malfunction in speaker.
Noise is mixed with audio.
door speaker LH, rear door speaker RH, Refer to:
rear speaker LH and rear speaker RH). - AV-285, "Removal and Installation"
(tweeter). F
door speaker).
door speaker). G
speaker).
H
Function".
Poor connector connection of antenna or
Noise is mixed with radio only (when the ve- I
antenna feeder.
hicle hits a bump or while driving over bad
Refer to AV-189, "Antennas, Antenna Amp.
roads)
and Antenna Feeder".
• Other audio sounds are normal. J
• Any radio station cannot be received or Poor connector connection of antenna or
poor reception is caused even after mov- antenna feeder.
No radio reception or poor reception.
ing to a service area with good reception Refer to AV-189, "Antennas, Antenna Amp.
(e.g. a place with clear view and no ob- and Antenna Feeder". K
stacles generating external noises).
• Malfunction in antenna, antenna feeder
or AV control unit. Perform DTC diagno- L
sis.
There is malfunction in the CONSULT self Refer to AV-234, "Diagnosis Procedure".
diagnosis result. • Poor continuity in antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-198, "CONSULT Function". • Poor connector connection of antenna or M
antenna feeder.
No satellite radio reception. Amp. and Antenna Feeder".
AV
• Poor continuity in antenna feeder.
• Poor connector connection of antenna or
There is no malfunction in the CONSULT antenna feeder.
self diagnosis result. • Loose satellite radio antenna mounting O
Refer to AV-198, "CONSULT Function". nut.
Amp. and Antenna Feeder".
P
The majority of buzz/rattle sounds are not
Refer to "SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROU-
indicative of an issue with the speaker, usu-
Buzz/rattle sound from speaker BLE DIAGNOSIS" in the appropriate interi-
ally something nearby the speaker is caus-
or trim section.
ing the buzz/rattle.

• Before performing diagnosis, confirm that the cellular phone being used by the customer is compatible with
the vehicle.

MULTI AV SYSTEM
• It is possible that a malfunction is occurring due to a version change of the phone even though the phone is
a compatible type. This can be confirmed by changing the cellular phone to another compatible type, and
check that it operates normally. It is important to determine whether the cause of the malfunction is the vehi-
cle or the cellular phone.
Check Compatibility
1. Make sure the customer’s Bluetooth® related concern is understood.
2. Verify the customer’s concern.
NOTE:
The customer’s phone may be required, depending upon their concern.
3. Write down the customer’s phone brand, model and service provider.
NOTE:
It is necessary to know the service provider. On occasion, a given phone may be on the approved list with
one provider, but may not be on the approved list with other providers.
4. Go to “www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/”.
a. Using the website’s search engine, find out if the customer’s phone is on the approved list.
b. If the customer’s phone is NOT on the approved list:
Stop diagnosis here. The customer needs to obtain a Bluetooth® phone that is on the approved list before
any further action.
c. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “N” (not compatible):
Stop diagnosis here. If the customer still wants the feature to function, they will need to get an approved
phone showing the feature as “Y” (compatible) in the “Basic Features”.
d. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “Y” (compatible):
Perform diagnosis as per the following table.

Does not recognize cellular phone connec-
tion (no connection is displayed on the dis- Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
play at the guide).
• Hands-free phone operation can be
made, but the communication cannot be
established. Malfunction in AV control unit.
Hands-free phone cannot be established. • Hands-free phone operation can be per- Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-280,
formed, however, voice between each "Removal and Installation".
other cannot be heard during the conver-
sation.
The other party’s voice cannot be heard by Check the “microphone speaker” in Inspec-
hands-free phone. tion & Adjustment Mode if sound is heard.
Originating sound is not heard by the other Sound operation function is normal.
party with hands-free phone communica- Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
tion. Sound operation function does not work.
• The voice recognition can be controlled. Steering switch malfunction.
• Steering switch’s and Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-282,
switch works, but does not work. "Removal and Installation".
The system cannot be operated. Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.

Steering switch’s , and
switches do not work. Refer to AV-262, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Steering switch ground circuit malfunction.

All steering switches do not work.
RELATED TO NAVIGATION

MULTI AV SYSTEM
A
• Malfunction in SD card.
Navigation malfunction.
Function". B
Navigation system is inoperative. Steering switches malfunction.
Microphone signal circuit malfunction. C
Voice activated control malfunction.
D
AV

RELATED TO NOISE
The majority of the audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference,
etc.).
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to moun-
tains or buildings blocking the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the
antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings.
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and opera-
tion of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause.
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
components, one by one.
Type of Noise and Possible Cause
Occurrence condition Possible cause

A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
Occurs only when engine is ON. • Ignition components
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.
The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump. • Fuel pump condenser
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op- • Relay malfunction, AV control unit malfunc-
Noise only occurs when various eration of various switches. tion
electrical components are oper-
ating. The noise occurs when various motors are operat- • Motor case ground
ing. • Motor
• Rear defogger coil malfunction
The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions. • Open circuit in printed heater
• Poor ground of antenna feeder line
• Ground wire of body parts
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when
• Ground due to improper part installation
it is vibrating excessively.
• Wiring connections or a short circuit
Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized

Does not recognize cellular phone connection (No connection is by the in-vehicle phone module.
displayed on the display at the guide). Refer to “RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE (Check Compati-
bility)” in AV-267, "Symptom Table".
Customer will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the fol-
lowing conditions:
• The vehicle is outside of the telephone service area.
• The vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio
waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage,
near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
Cannot use hands-free phone. • The cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
NOTE:
While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wire-
less connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System cannot charge cellular phones.

A
When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too
The other party’s voice cannot be heard by hands-free phone. loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a
call.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or B
Poor sound quality. far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection disruption.
RELATED TO NAVIGATION C
Basic Operation
D
No image is shown. Display brightness adjustment is set fully to DARK Adjust the display brightness.
side.
E
No guide sound is heard. Volume control is set to OFF, MIN or MAX. Adjust the audio guide volume.
Audio guide volume is too low or
Audio guidance is not available while the vehicle is System is not malfunctioning.
too high.
driving on a dark pink route.
F
Screen is too dark. Temperature inside the vehicle is low. Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle
Motion of the image is too slow. reaches the proper temperature.
Small black or bright spots appear Symptom peculiar to a liquid crystal display (dis- System is not malfunctioning. G
on the screen. play unit).
Vehicle Mark
H
Map screen and BIRDVIEW™ Some thinning of the character data is done to pre- System is not malfunctioning.
Name of the place vary with the vent the display becoming to complex. In some I
screen. cases and in some locations, the display contents
may differ.
The same place name, street name, etc. may not
be displayed every time on account of the data J
processing.
Vehicle mark is not positioned cor- Vehicle is transferred by ferry or by towing after its Drive the vehicle for a while in the GPS sat-
rectly. ignition switch is turned to OFF. ellite signal receiving condition. K
Screen will not switch to nighttime The daytime screen is selected by the “SWITCH Perform screen dimming and select the
mode after the lighting switch is SCREENS” when the last time the screen dim- nighttime screen by “SWITCH SCREENS”.
turned ON. ming setting is done.
Switching between daytime/nighttime screen may L
be inhibited by the automatic illumination adjust-
ment function.
Map screen will not scroll in accor- Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current lo- M
dance with the vehicle travel. cation.
Vehicle mark will not be shown. Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current lo-
cation. AV
Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite GPS satellite signal is intercepted because the ve- Move the vehicle out to an open space.
mark) on the map screen stays hicle is in or behind a building.
gray.
GPS satellite signal cannot be received because Do not place anything on top of the meter dis- O
an obstacle is placed on top of the instrument pan- play (instrument panel).
el.
GPS satellites are not visible from current location. Wait until GPS satellites are visible by mov-
P
ing the vehicle.

Vehicle location accuracy is low. Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the Current location is not determined.
map screen stays gray.
Vehicle speed setting by the vehicle speed pulse Drive the vehicle for a while [for approx. 30
has been deviated (advanced or retarded) from minutes at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH)] and
the actual vehicle speed because tire chain is fit- the deviation will be automatically adjusted. If
ted or the system has been used on another vehi- advancement or retard still occur, perform
cle. the distance adjustment by CONFIRMA-
TION/ADJUSTMENT mode of diagnosis
function.
Map data has error or omission. (Vehicle mark is As a rule, an updated map DVD–ROM will be
always deviated to the same position.) released once a year.
Destination, Passing Points and Menu Items Cannot be Selected/Set

Destination cannot be set. Destination to be set is on an expressway. Set the destination on an ordinary road.
Passing point is not searched The vehicle has already passed the passing point, To include the passing points that have been
when re-searching the route. or the system judged so. passed into the route again, set the route
again.
Route information will not be dis- Route searching has not been done. Set the destination and perform route
played. searching.
Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route.
Route information is not available on the dark pink System is not malfunctioning.
route.
After the route searching, no guide Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route.
sign will appear as the vehicle (On the display, only guide signs related to the rec-
goes near the entrance/exit to the ommended route will be shown.)
toll road.
Automatic route searching is not Vehicle is driving on a highway (gray route), or no Drive on a road to be searched. Or re–search
possible. recommended route is available. the route manually. In this case, however, the
whole route will be searched.
Performed automatic detour Performed search with every condition consid- System is not malfunctioning.
search (or detour search). Howev- ered. However, the result is the same as that of the
er, the result is the same as that of previous search.
the previous search.
Passing points cannot be set. More than five passing points were set. Passing points can be set up to five. To stop
at more than five points, perform sharing in
several steps.
When setting the route, the starting The current vehicle location is always set as the System is not malfunctioning.
point cannot be selected. starting point of a route.
Some menu items cannot be se- The vehicle is being driven. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and then op-
lected. erate the system.
Voice Guide

Symptom Cause Remedy A

Voice guide will not operate. Note: Voice guide is only available at intersections System is not malfunctioning.
that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by z on
the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given
B
even when the route on the map changes direction.
The vehicle is not on the recommended route. Return to the recommended route or re-
search the route.
C
Voice guide is turned OFF. Turn voice guide ON.
Voice guide does not match the ac- Voice guide may vary with the direction to which Drive in conformity to the actual traffic rules. D
tual road pattern. the vehicle is turned and the connection of the road
to other roads.
Route Search E

No route is shown. No road to be searched is found around the des- Find wider road (orange road or wider) near- F
tination. by and reset the destination and passing
points onto it. Take care of the traveling direc-
tion when there are separate up and down
roads. G
Starting point and the destination are too close. Set the destination at more distant point.
Conditional traffic regulation (day of the week/ Turn the time-regulating search conditions
time of the day) is set at the area around the cur- OFF. Turn “Avoid regulation time” in the H
rent location or the destination. search conditions OFF.
Indicated route is intermittent. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not System is not malfunctioning.
used for the search(Note)Therefore, the route to I
the current location or the passing points may be
intermittent.
When the vehicle has passed the A recommended route is controlled by each sec- System is not malfunctioning. J
recommended route, it is deleted tion. When the vehicle has passed the passing
from the screen. point 1, then the map data from the starting point
up to the passing point 1 will be deleted. (The data
may remain undeleted in some area.) K
Detouring route is recommended. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not Set the route closer to the basic route (gray
used for the search. (Note). Therefore, detour route).
route may be recommended. L
A detour route may be shown when some traffic Slightly move the starting point or the destina-
regulation (one-way traffic, etc.) is set at the area tion, or set the passing point on the route of
around the starting point or the destination. your choice.
M
In the area where highways (gray routes) are System is not malfunctioning.
used for the search, left turn has priority around
the current location and the destination (passing
points). For this reason, the recommended route AV
may be detouring.
Landmarks on the map do not This can happen due to omission or error in the As a rule, an updated map DVD-ROM will be
match the actual ones. map data. released once a year. Wait until the latest O
map has become available.
Recommended route is far from Starting point, passing points, and destination of Reset the destination onto the road nearby. If
the starting point, passing points, the route guide were set far from the desired this road is one of the highways (gray routes),
P
and destination. points because route searching data around an ordinary road nearby may be displayed as
these area were not stored. the recommended route.
NOTE:
Except for the ordinance-designated cities. (Malfunctioning areas may be changed in the updated map disc.)
Examples of Current-Location Mark Displacement

Vehicle's travel amount is calculated by reading its travel distance and turning angle. Therefore, if the vehicle
is driven in the following manner, an error will occur in the vehicle's current location display. If correct location
has not been restored after driving the vehicle for a while, perform location correction.
SEL698V

Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.) A
Y–intersections
At a Y intersection or similar gradual divi-

sion of roads, an error in the direction of B
travel deduced by the sensor may result in
the current-location mark appearing on the
wrong road.
C
ELK0192D
Spiral roads
D
When driving on a large, continuous spiral
road (such as loop bridge), turning angle
error is accumulated and the vehicle mark
E
may deviate from the correct location.
ELK0193D
Straight roads
F
When driving on a long, straight road and
slow curve without stopping, map-matching
does not work effectively enough and dis-
tance errors may accumulate. As a result,
G
rect location when the vehicle is turned at a
If after travelling about 10 km (6
corner. H
miles) the correct location has
Road config- ELK0194D
uration Zigzag roads cation correction and, if neces-
When driving on a zigzag road, the map I
may be matched to other roads in the simi-
lar direction nearby at every turn, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the correct
location. J
ELK0195D
Roads laid out in a grid pattern K

When driving where roads are laid out in a
grid pattern, or where many roads are run-
ning in the similar direction nearby, the map
may be matched to them by mistake and L
rect location.
ELK0196D
M
Parallel roads
When two roads are running in parallel

(such as highway and sideway), the map AV
may be matched to the other road by mis-
take and the vehicle mark may deviate from
the correct location.
O
ELK0197D

In a parking lot When driving in a parking lot, or other loca-
tion where there are no roads on the map,
matching may place the vehicle mark on a
nearby road. When the vehicle returns to
the road, the vehicle mark may have devi-
ated from the correct location.
When driving in circle or turning the steer-
ing wheel repeatedly, direction errors accu-
SEL709V
mulate, and the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct location.
Turntable
When the ignition switch is OFF, the navi-
gation system cannot get the signal from
the gyroscope (angular speed sensor).
Place Therefore, the displayed direction may be
wrong and the correct road may not be eas-
ily returned to after rotating the vehicle on a
turntable with the ignition OFF.
SEL710V
Slippery roads On snow, wet roads, gravel, or other roads

where tires may slip easily, accumulated
mileage errors may cause the vehicle mark If after travelling about 10 km (6
to deviate from the correct road. miles) the correct location has
Slopes When parking in sloped garages, when
cation correction and, if neces-
travelling on banked roads, or in other cas-
es where the vehicle turns when tilted, an
error in the turning angle will occur, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the road.
Road not displayed on the map screen
When driving on new roads or other roads
not displayed on the map screen, map
matching does not function correctly and
matches the location to a nearby road.
When the vehicle returns to a road which is
on the map, the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct road.
SEL699V
Map data Different road pattern

(Changed due to repair)
If the road pattern stored in the map data
and the actual road pattern are different,
map matching does not function correctly
and matches the location to a nearby road.
The vehicle mark may deviate from the cor-
rect road.
ELK0201D
Drive the vehicle for a while. If

the distance still deviates, ad-
When tire chains are used, the mileage is
just it by using the distance ad-
Vehicle Use of tire chains not correctly detected, and the vehicle mark
justment function. (If the tire
may deviate from the correct road.
chain is removed, recover the
original value.)

A
If the vehicle is driven just after the engine
is started when the gyroscope (angular
Wait for a short while before
Just after the engine is started speed sensor) correction is not completed,
driving after starting the engine.
the vehicle can lose its direction and may B
have deviated from the correct location.
Continuous driving without stopping When driving long distances without stop-
Precautions ping, direction errors may accumulate, and
for driving the current-location mark may deviate from
Stop and adjust the orientation. C
the correct road.
Abusive driving Spinning the wheels or engaging in other If after travelling about 10 km (6
kinds of abusive driving may result in the miles) the correct location has D
system being unable perform correct detec- not been restored, perform lo-
tion, and may cause the vehicle mark to de- cation correction and, if neces-
viate from the correct road. sary, direction correction.
E
Position correction accuracy
Enter in the road displayed on
If the accuracy of location settings is poor, the screen with an accuracy of
accuracy may be reduced when the correct approx. 1mm. F
road cannot be found, particularly in places Caution: Whenever possible,
where there are many roads. use detailed map for the correc-
tion.
G
How to cor- SEL701V
rect location Direction when location is corrected

H
If the accuracy of location settings during
correction is poor, accuracy may be re- Perform direction correction.
duced afterwards.
I
SEL702V
Location Correction by Map-Matching is Slow J

• The map-matching function needs to refer to the data of the surrounding area. It is necessary to drive some
distance for the function to work.
• Because map-matching operates on this principle, when there are many roads running in similar directions K
in the surrounding area, no matching determination may be made. The location may not be corrected until
some special feature is found.
Name of Road is Not Displayed L
The current road name may not be displayed if there are no road names displayed on the map screen.
Contents of Display Differ for Birdview™ and the (Flat) Map Screen
Difference of the BIRDVIEW™ screen from the flat map screen are as follows. M
• The current place name displays names which are primarily in the direction of vehicle travel.
• The amount of time before the vehicle travel or turn angle is updated on the screen is longer than for the
(flat) map display. AV
• The conditions for display of place names, roads, and other data are different for nearby areas and for more
distant areas.
• Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming too complex. In some cases
and in some locations, the display contents may differ. O
• The same place name, street name, etc. may be displayed multiple times.
Vehicle Mark Shows a Position Which is Completely Wrong
In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear on completely different position in the map depending on P
the GPS satellite signal receiving conditions. In this case, perform location correction and direction correction.
• When location correction has not been done
- If the receiving conditions of the GPS satellite signal is poor, if the vehicle mark becomes out of place, it may
move to a completely different location and not come back if location correction is not done. The position will
be corrected if the GPS signal can be received.
• When the vehicle has traveled by ferry, or when the vehicle has been being towed

- Because calculation of the current location cannot be done when traveling with the ignition off, for example
when traveling by ferry or when being towed, the location before travel is displayed. If the precise location
can be detected with GPS, the location will be corrected.
Vehicle Mark Jumps
In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear to jump as a result of automatic correction of the current
location.
• When map matching has been done
- If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when map matching is done, the vehicle mark may
seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to the wrong road or to a location which is not on
a road.
• When GPS location correction has been done
- If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when the location is corrected using GPS measure-
ments, the vehicle mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to a location which
is not on a road.
Vehicle Mark is in a River or Sea
The navigation system moves the vehicle mark with no distinction between land and rivers or sea. If the vehi-
cle mark is somehow out of place, it may appear that the vehicle is driving in a river or the sea.
Vehicle Mark Automatically Rotates
The system wrongly memorizes the rotating status as stopping when the ignition switch is turned ON with the
turntable rotating. That causes the vehicle mark to rotate when the vehicle is stopped.
When Driving on Same Road, Sometimes Vehicle Mark is in Right Place and Sometimes it is in Wrong Place
The conditions of the GPS antenna (GPS data) and gyroscope (angular speed sensor) change gradually.
Depending on the road traveled and the operation of the steering wheel, the location detection results will be
different. Therefore, even on a road on which the location has never been wrong, conditions may cause the
vehicle mark to deviate.

AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE)]

AV CONTROL UNIT
B
AWIIA2142ZZ J
K

L
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
NOTE:
O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

AV CONTROL UNIT

STEERING SWITCHES
STEERING SWITCHES
A
I
AWGIA0369ZZ
1. Driver air bag module 2. Steering wheel 3. Cover J

4. Steering column cover 5. Steering wheel switches

K
REMOVAL
NOTE:
L
The steering switches are serviced as an assembly.
1. Remove steering wheel. Refer to ST-30, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screws (A) and pawls then remove steering wheel rear
M
: Pawl
AV
ALNIA1731ZZ
P

STEERING SWITCHES
3. Remove screws (A) and pawls then remove steering wheel front
: Pawl
AWNIA4073ZZ
4. Remove screws (A) and remove steering switches from steering

wheel (1).
ALNIA1733ZZ
INSTALLATION

A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove shift selector finisher. Refer to IP-20, "Exploded View".
2. Release pawls and remove USB interface and AUX in jack (2)
from the back of the shift selector finisher (1). C
: Pawl
D
ALNIA1729ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER (LH)

REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the harness connector from instrument panel
tweeter (LH) and remove screws (A) to remove instrument panel
tweeter [LH (1)].

: Front
AWNIA4124ZZ
INSTALLATION
INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER (RH)
REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel tweeter grill. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from instrument panel tweeter (RH) and remove screws to remove
instrument panel tweeter.
INSTALLATION

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
ALNIA1743ZZ
1. Front door finisher 2. Front door speaker G
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar. H
REMOVAL I
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screws (A) and pull out front door speaker (1).
NOTE: J
ALNIA1727ZZ
M
3. Disconnect the harness connector from front door speaker and remove.
INSTALLATION
AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-30, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screws (A) then remove rear door speaker (1).
NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar.
ALNIA1684ZZ
INSTALLATION

REAR SPEAKER
REAR SPEAKER
A
AWNIA4098ZZ
1. Rear speaker 2. Rear parcel shelf Front G
NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar. H
REMOVAL I
1. Remove the rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-38, "REAR PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Installa-
tion".
J
2. Remove the rear speaker screws.
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the rear speaker and remove.
INSTALLATION K
AV

REMOVAL
1. Lower headlining (rear). Refer to INT-48, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect harness connector (B) from antenna feeder.
3. Remove nut (A) from satellite antenna (1) and remove.
: Front
ALNIA1734ZZ
INSTALLATION
Satellite radio antenna nut : 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)

CAUTION:
If the satellite antenna nut is not tightened to the specified torque, lower sensitivity of the antenna may
be experienced. If the nut is tightened tighter than the specified torque, this will deform the roof panel.
Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000014275916
DISASSEMBLY
Insert a suitable tool into gap between satellite antenna (2) and the
cover (1) then remove the cover (1) from satellite antenna (2).
ALNIA1735ZZ
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA AMP.
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove rear pillar finisher (RH). Refer to INT-38, "REAR PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connectors (A) from the antenna amp.
(1). C
3. Remove bolt (B) and remove.
: Front
D
ALNIA1747ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

GPS ANTENNA
GPS ANTENNA
REMOVAL
2. Remove screw to remove GPS antenna from instrument panel.
INSTALLATION

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
A
REMOVAL B
assembly (2). C
: Pawl
D
ALNIA1691ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

REMOVAL
1. Remove shift selector finisher. Refer to IP-20, "Exploded View"
2. Disconnect the harness connector (B) from the multifunction
switch (1).
3. Remove screws (A) and remove multifunction switch (1) from
the shift selector finisher (2).
ALNIA1780ZZ
INSTALLATION

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
WARNING: D
nance and repair be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
see the SR section.
F
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the H
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the I
J
CAUTION:
Remove battery terminal, and AV control unit after a lapse of 30 seconds or more after turning the igni-
tion switch OFF. K
NOTE:
L
M
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less. AV
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000014275924 O
P

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]
PKIA0306E
twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
- Oily dirt:
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
- For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
(TechMate No.) C
Tool name
(J-46534) D
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ
F
G
H
PIIB1407E
AV

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
AWNIA4093ZZ

1. Rear view camera Refer to AV-298, "Rear Camera".
2. Door mirror RH Refer to AV-298, "Side Camera".
3. Front camera Refer to AV-298, "Front Camera".
4. Around view monitor control unit Refer to AV-297, "Around View Monitor Control Unit".
6. Combination meter Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter".
7. Door mirror LH Refer to AV-298, "Side Camera".
8. Steering angle sensor Refer to AV-298, "Steering Angle Sensor".
Around View Monitor Control Unit INFOID:0000000014275929
• The around view monitor control unit is installed at the lower dash.
• Necessary signals are transmitted/received to/from control unit via
CAN communication.
• Camera image signals received from each camera are converted/
synthesized in the around view monitor control unit and transmitted
to the AV control unit.
• Vehicle width guide lines, predicted course line, vehicle front guid-
ing line, vehicle side line and vehicle icon are rendered with the
around view monitor control unit and combined with camera
image.
AWNIA4090ZZ

COMPONENT PARTS
Front Camera INFOID:0000000014275930
A
• The front camera is installed in the front grille.
• Power for the camera is supplied from the around view monitor
control unit, and the image at the front of the vehicle is sent to the B
around view monitor control unit.
D
JSNIA6179ZZ
Side Camera INFOID:0000000014275931

E
• The side cameras are installed in the door mirrors.
• Power for the cameras is supplied from the around view monitor
control unit, and the images at the sides of the vehicle are sent to F
the around view monitor control unit.
H
JSNIA5851ZZ
Rear Camera INFOID:0000000014275932

I
• The rear camera is installed next to the license plate lamp.
• Power for the camera is supplied from the around view monitor
control unit, and the image at the rear of the vehicle is sent to the J
JSNIA6012ZZ
Steering Angle Sensor INFOID:0000000014275933 M
• Steering angle sensor is installed to the spiral cable.

• Steering angle sensor sends the steering signal necessary for pre-
dictive course line of the front or rear view to the around view mon- AV
itor control unit via CAN communication.
JSNIA1571ZZ

SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
AWNIA4289GB
DESCRIPTION
• This system is equipped with wide-angle cameras on the front, rear and right and left door mirrors.
• Images from front view, rear view, front-side view (RH side), and birds-eye view are displayed to monitor the
vehicle surroundings.
• Around view monitor control unit expands the image received from each camera to create each view.
• In front view and rear view, the vehicle width, distance lines and predictive course lines are displayed.
• In front-side view, the vehicle distance guiding line and vehicle width guiding line are displayed.
• Birds-eye view converts the images from the cameras into an overhead view and displays the status of the
vehicle on the display. The vehicle icon that is displayed in the birds-eye view is depicted by the around view
monitor control unit.
• Moving Object Detection (MOD) is adopted and detects moving objects according to camera image and noti-
fies the detection result to the driver.
AROUND VIEW MONITOR DISPLAY

SYSTEM
The around view monitor combines and displays travel direction view (front or rear), front-side view and birds-
eye view. A
JSNIA3982GB
OPERATION DESCRIPTION F
• The around view monitor operates by pressing the CAMERA switch on the AV control unit or by shifting the
shift lever switch to the R (reverse) position.
• When the shift lever switch is in any position other than R (reverse) and the CAMERA switch is pressed, the G
screen displays front travel direction view and birds-eye view. Pressing the CAMERA switch again changes
birds-eye view to front-side view
• When the shift lever switch is placed in R (reverse), the screen displays rear travel direction view and birds-
H
eye view. Pressing the CAMERA switch changes birds-eye view to front-side view
• In birds-eye view, the blind spot area is displayed in black to show the border of the camera images. After
pressing the CAMERA switch for the first time or placing the shift lever switch in R (reverse) for the first time,
the blind spot area is highlighted in yellow for 3 seconds and the red sonar warning indicator blinks five I
times.
• With the shift lever switch in any position other than R (reverse), the around view monitor screen display is
cancelled 3 minutes after pressing the CAMERA switch. The screen returns to the AV control unit display. J
• With the shift lever switch in R (reverse) position, the around view monitor screen display remains on con-
stantly. To return to the AV control unit display, place the shift lever switch is in any position other than R
(reverse).
• If camera image calibration is incomplete, the applicable camera position is indicated as an error on the K
birds-eye view display.
NOTE:
Calibration is necessary when replacing each camera or when replacing around view monitor control unit. L
AV

SYSTEM
Around view monitor screen transition
JSNIA4607GB
Front View
• The front view image improves the visibility of obstacles in front of the vehicle and assists driving by display-
ing images from birds-eye view and front-side view.
• The front view image displays the vehicle width guiding line and vehicle distance guiding line, in addition to
the predictive course line according to the steering angle.
• If the steering angle is within approximately 90 degrees, the predictive course lines on the left/right side are
displayed. If the steering angle exceeds approximately 90 degrees, only the predictive course line on the
outside is displayed (opposite side of steering direction).
• The around view monitor control unit receives the steering angle signal from steering angle sensor via CAN
communication, and controls the direction and distance of the predictive course line.
• ON/OFF setting of predictive course line can be performed using CONSULT.

SYSTEM
Front view guiding lines
A
JSNIA0770GB F
Rear View
• The rear view image improves the visibility of obstacles in the rear of the vehicle and assists backing and
parking by displaying images from birds-eye view and front side view. G
• The rear view image displays the vehicle width guiding line and vehicle distance guiding line, in addition to
the predictive course line according to the steering angle.
NOTE: H
The predictive course line is not displayed at the steering neutral position.
• The around view monitor control unit receives the steering angle signal from steering angle sensor via CAN
communication, and controls the direction and distance of the predictive course line.
• ON/OFF setting of predictive course line can be performed using CONSULT. I
Rear view guiding lines
J
AV
JSNIA6112GB
O
Front-side View
• The front-side view image improves the visibility of obstacles in the front RH side of the vehicle and assists
backing and parking.
• The front-side view image displays the vehicle distance guiding line and vehicle width guiding line. P

SYSTEM
Front-side view area and guiding line
JSNIA0771GB
Birds-eye View
Birds-Eye View
• The birds-eye view image improves the visibility of obstacles all around the vehicle and assists backing and
parking.
• The images from the four cameras are converted into an overhead view, and the surroundings of the vehicle
are displayed.
• The blind spot area is displayed on the image to specify the boundary of the four cameras.
Birds-Eye view display image
AWNIA4091GB

SYSTEM
Birds-Eye view display area
A
H
AWNIA3142GB
Moving Object Detection (MOD)

• Moving Object Detection (MOD) is a function that notifies the driver of the presence of moving objects in the I
area around the vehicle. MOD detects moving objects from camera image, illuminates frame of view in yel-
low whenever “MOD” icon is displayed in blue.
• Around view monitor control unit superimposes yellow frame line on camera image signal and outputs it to
AV control unit display when moving objects are detected. J
• Around view monitor control unit detects moving objects from camera image according to an image recogni-
tion method called optical flow.
• MOD does not detect a background as a moving object when the vehicle moves (when whole screen K
moves) but detects a moving object when an actual moving object is displayed on screen.
• Color of “MOD” icon indicates whether or not MOD is operative. “MOD” icon is displayed as shown in the fol-
lowing table. when MOD is operative, “MOD” icon is displayed in blue. when MOD is not operative, “MOD”
icon is displayed in gray. L
Shift position
M
View P or N position D position R position
“MOD” icon display
Birds-Eye view Blue Gray AV
Birds-Eye view and rear view —
Rear view Gray Blue
Birds-Eye view Blue Gray
Birds-Eye view and front view — O
Front view Gray Blue
Side view × ×
Side view and rear view —
Rear view Gray Blue P
Side view × ×
Side view and front view —
Front view Gray Blue
Rear wide view Gray — Blue
Front wide view Gray Blue —
×: Icon is not displayed.
—: View is not displayed in each shift position (D position and R position).

SYSTEM
• MOD illuminates frame of view in yellow when any of the conditions in the following table are satisfied:
Operation Condition
View where MOD is operative
Shift position Vehicle speed
P or N position 0 km/h Birds-Eye view
0 km/h (0 MPH) or more - less than 8 km/h (5 • Front view
D position
MPH) • Front wide view
0 km/h (0 MPH) or more - less than 8 km/h (5 • Rear view
R position
MPH) • Rear wide view
• MOD does not operate or stops operation when any of the conditions in the following table are satisfied:
Operation stop condition Note

• MOD does not stop operation for front view and front wide view.
Door open • Operation stops for rear view and rear wide view while tailgate is open.
• Operation stops for Bird’s-Eye view when any door is open.
CAMERA IMAGE OPERATION PRINCIPLE

• If the information written to around view monitor control unit and the information from the camera do not
match, the applicable camera position is indicated as an error on the Birds-Eye view display. (Calibration
operation is necessary when replacing each camera or when replacing around view monitor control unit.)
• Around view monitor control unit receives the camera switch signal from AV control unit via CAN communi-
cation by pressing the “CAMERA” button.
• Around view monitor control unit that receives the camera button signal supplies the power to each camera
and inputs the camera image from each camera.
• When the shift lever switch is in the reverse position, around view monitor control unit receives the reverse
signal, supplies the power to each camera, and inputs the camera image from each camera.
• Around view monitor control unit that receives the camera image signal from each camera cuts out the
required screen for each view, superimposes the camera image, vehicle icon, guiding lines, sonar indicator
and “MOD” icon and outputs them to the display unit.
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000014275935
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
U0428: ST ANGLE SENSOR CAL-
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle
IBRATION Predicted course line is not displayed.
sensor is not complete.
The following functions are stopped

• When communication of steering angle
sensor signal is not normal:
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
When around view monitor control unit cannot
• When communication of wheel speed sen-
U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT transmit/receive CAN communication signal
sor signal, and shift signal is not normal:
continuously for 2 seconds or more.
stopped.
• When communication of sonar control unit
is not normal:
- Sonar indicator displayed in red.

SYSTEM
DTC
Display contents of CONSULT A
No-signal status of rear camera image signal is
U111A: REAR CAMERA IMAGE
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition
SIGNAL
switch is ON. B
No-signal status of side camera RH image signal
U111B: SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE
is continued for 500 ms or more while ignition
SIGNAL
switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (gray screen C
No-signal status of front camera image signal is display).
U111C: FRONT CAMERA IMAGE
SIGNAL
switch is ON.
D
No-signal status of side camera LH image signal
U111D: SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE
SIGNAL
switch is ON.
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle E
U1232: ST ANGLE SEN CALIB sensor is performed. NG signal from steering an- Predicted course line is not displayed.
gle sensor is received.
Camera power supply voltage does not satisfy F
the following conditions for 2 seconds or more
when ignition switch is turned ON:
U1302: CAMERA POWER VOLT • When supplemental lighting power supply out- Camera power output is stopped.
put is ON: 5.9 – 6.5 V. G
• When OFF: 0 V by camera power supply mea-
surement.
• When camera calibration is incomplete. H
• When camera information in around view Unmatched icon display (red) is displayed
U1304: CAMERA IMAGE CALIB
monitor control unit and information read from (applicable for unmatched camera only).
camera are not the same.
I
The vehicle setting of around view monitor con- Operation is according to the vehicle setting
U1305: CONFIG UNFINISH
trol unit is incomplete. value as default value.
AV

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
CONSULT FUNCTIONS
CONSULT performs the following functions via communication with the around view monitor control unit.

ECU Identification The around view monitor control unit part number is displayed.
Self Diagnostic Result The around view monitor control unit self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The around view monitor control unit input/output data is displayed in real time.
Work support The settings for around view monitor control unit functions can be changed.
Configuration
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing around view monitor control unit.
CAN Diag Support Mntr The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of around view monitor control unit is displayed.
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item Description

ST ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL [On/Off] Indicates condition of steering angle sensor signal.
REVERSE SIGNAL [On/Off] Indicates selector lever position.
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL [mph/km/h] Indicates condition of vehicle speed signal.
CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL [On/Off] Indicates condition of camera switch signal.
CAMERA OFF SIGNAL [On/Off] Indicates condition of camera OFF signal.
ST ANGLE SENSOR TYPE [Absolute] Indicates steering angle sensor type.
STEERING GEAR RATIO TYPE [Type
Indicates steering gear ratio type.
0]
STEERING POSITION [LHD/RHD] Indicates LH or RH drive type.
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL [OK/
Indicates condition of camera image signal.
NG]
F-CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL [OK/NG] Indicates condition of camera image signal.
DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG [OK/
NG]
PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG [OK/
NG]
ILL [ON/OFF] Indicates condition of illumination signal.
TURN SIGNAL [ON/OFF] Indicates condition of turn signal.
WORK SUPPORT
Support Item Setting Description

STATUS
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE AXIS X

Performs calibration of front camera.
(FRONT CAMERA) AXIS Y
ROTATE

Support Item Setting Description
A
STATUS

Performs calibration of passenger side camera.
(PASS-SIDE CAMERA) AXIS Y B
ROTATE
STATUS
AXIS X C
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE
Performs calibration of driver side camera.
(DR-SIDE CAMERA) AXIS Y
ROTATE
D
STATUS

Performs calibration of rear view camera.
(REAR CAMERA) AXIS Y E
ROTATE
STATUS
F
SELECT
Confirmation and adjustment of difference between each camera can be per-
FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW AXIS X
formed.
AXIS Y G
ROTATE
STATUS
H
REAR WIDE-VIEW FIXED GUIDE AXIS X
Correct rear wide-view fixed guide line positions.
LINE CORRECTION AXIS Y
PATTERN I
ON
NON-VIEWABLE AREA REMINDER ON/OFF setting of non-viewable area can be performed.
OFF
ON
J
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE
ON/OFF setting of predictive course line display can be performed.
DISPLAY OFF
INITIALIZE CAMERA IMAGE
— Factory image calibration restoration can be performed. K
CALIBRATION
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
— Steering angle sensor neutral position adjustment can be performed.
ADJUSTMENT
L
CAUSE OF ENTRY CANCEL — Cause item can be cancelled.
ON
MOD-FUNCTION ON/OFF setting of moving object detection (MOD) can be performed.
OFF M
CONFIGURATION
AV
O

AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]


CAMERA switch ON. Off
CAMERA OFF SIGNAL
CAMERA switch OFF. On
CAMERA switch OFF. Off
CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL
CAMERA switch ON. On
Side camera LH inoperative. NG
DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG
Side camera LH operative. OK
Front camera inoperative. NG
F-CAMERA IMAGE SIG
Front camera operative. OK
Illumination OFF. Off
ILL
Illumination ON. On
Side camera RH inoperative. NG
PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG
Side camera RH operative. OK
Rear view camera LH inoperative. NG
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
Rear view camera LH operative. OK
When selector lever is in any position other than R (reverse). Off
REVERSE SIGNAL
When selector lever in R (reverse). On
Around view monitor control unit is not receiving steering angle
Off
sensor signal.
ST ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL
Around view monitor control unit is receiving steering angle sen-
On
sor signal.
ST ANGLE SENSOR TYPE Steering angle sensor type. Absolute
STEERING GEAR RATIO TYPE Steering gear ratio type. Type 0
Left hand drive vehicle. LHD
STEERING POSITION
Right hand drive vehicle. RHD
Turn signal OFF. Off
TURN SIGNAL
Turn signal ON. On
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL While driving, equivalent to speedometer reading mph, km/h
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA3807ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal A
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
3
— Video output ground — — —
(Shield)
Ignition switch ON
4
Ground Video output signal Output • CAMERA switch is ON or shift position D
(B)
is R position
JSNIA0834GB
E
5
— Front camera ground — Ignition switch ON 0V
(B)
6 5 Front camera power F
Output Ignition switch ON 6.0 V
(R) (B) supply
7 Front camera video
— — Ignition switch ON 0V
(Shield) ground
G
Ignition switch ON H
8 7 Front camera video
Input • CAMERA switch is ON or shift position
(W) (Shield) signal
is R position
I
JSNIA0834GB
9 Door mirror RH cam-

(B) era ground J
10 9 Door mirror RH cam-
(R) (B) era power supply
11 Door mirror RH cam- K
(Shield) era video ground
L
Ignition switch ON
12 11 Door mirror RH cam-
(W) (Shield) era video signal
is R position
M
JSNIA0834GB
13 Door mirror LH cam- AV

(B) era ground
14 13 Door mirror LH cam-
(R) (B) era power supply O
15 Door mirror LH cam-
(Shield) era video ground
Ignition switch ON
16 15 Door mirror LH cam-
(W) (Shield) era video signal
is R position
JSNIA0834GB

Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
17 Rear view camera
(B) ground
18 17 Rear view camera
(R) (B) power supply
19 Rear view camera vid-
(Shield) eo ground
Ignition switch ON
20 19 Rear view camera vid-
(W) (Shield) eo signal
is R position
JSNIA0834GB
24 Input/
— CAN low — —
(Y) Output
26 Input/
(L) Output
Reverse signal Input Battery voltage
(G) (B) • R position
39
(B)
40 39
Ignition signal Input Ignition switch ON or START Battery voltage
(BG) (B)
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000014275938
DTC
Display contents of CONSULT
U0428: ST ANGLE SENSOR CAL-
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle
IBRATION Predicted course line is not displayed.
sensor is not complete.
The following functions are stopped

• When communication of steering angle
sensor signal is not normal:
stopped.
When around view monitor control unit cannot
• When communication of wheel speed sen-
U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT transmit/receive CAN communication signal
sor signal, and shift signal is not normal:
continuously for 2 seconds or more.
stopped.
• When communication of sonar control unit
is not normal:

DTC
Display contents of CONSULT A
No-signal status of rear camera image signal is
U111A: REAR CAMERA IMAGE
SIGNAL
switch is ON. B
No-signal status of side camera RH image signal
U111B: SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE
SIGNAL
switch is ON. Camera image is not displayed (gray screen C
No-signal status of front camera image signal is display).
U111C: FRONT CAMERA IMAGE
SIGNAL
switch is ON.
D
No-signal status of side camera LH image signal
U111D: SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE
SIGNAL
switch is ON.
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle E
U1232: ST ANGLE SEN CALIB sensor is performed. NG signal from steering an- Predicted course line is not displayed.
gle sensor is received.
Camera power supply voltage does not satisfy F
the following conditions for 2 seconds or more
when ignition switch is turned ON:
U1302: CAMERA POWER VOLT • When supplemental lighting power supply out- Camera power output is stopped.
put is ON: 5.9 – 6.5 V. G
• When OFF: 0 V by camera power supply mea-
surement.
• When camera calibration is incomplete. H
• When camera information in around view Unmatched icon display (red) is displayed
U1304: CAMERA IMAGE CALIB
monitor control unit and information read from (applicable for unmatched camera only).
camera are not the same.
I
The vehicle setting of around view monitor con- Operation is according to the vehicle setting
U1305: CONFIG UNFINISH
trol unit is incomplete. value as default value.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000014275939 J
tion priority chart:
K
1 U1305: CONFIG UNFINISH
L
2
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
• U0428: ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRATION M
• U111A: REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
• U111B: SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL
• U111C: FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
3
• U111D: SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL AV
• U1232: ST ANGLE SEN CALIB
• U1302: CAMERA POWER VOLT
• U1304: CAMERA IMAGE CALIB
O
P
DTC CONSULT display Refer to
U0428 ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRATION AV-333, "DTC Description"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) AV-337, "DTC Description"
U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL AV-338, "DTC Description"
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL AV-341, "DTC Description"

DTC CONSULT display Refer to
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL AV-344, "DTC Description"
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL AV-347, "DTC Description"
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT AV-351, "DTC Description"
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIB AV-355, "DTC Description"
U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH AV-356, "DTC Description"

AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
B
AV
AANWA1376GB

ABNIA9587GB

AV
ABNIA9588GB

ABNIA9589GB

AV
ABNIA9590GB

ABNIA9591GB

AV
ABNIA9592GB

ABNIA9593GB

AV
ABNIA9594GB

< BASIC INSPECTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JSNIA4482GB

• Reference 2: Refer to AV-312, "DTC Index".
DETAILED FLOW
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-
tion occurred).
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect CONSULT and perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-307, "CONSULT Function".
NOTE: A
B
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
C
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-312, "DTC Index". D
>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS E
Table". F
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR G
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV”.
NOTE: H
has been indicated in the “Self Diagnostic Result”.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur. I
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO >> Inspection End. J
AV

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR CON-
TROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR
CONTROL UNIT
When replacing around view monitor control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT
“Configuration” before replacement.
BEFORE REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “MANUAL CONFIGURATION” after replacing around
view monitor control unit
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
• When replacing around view monitor control unit, you must perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with
CONSULT.
• Never perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” except for new around view monitor control unit
1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION

tion".
NOTE:
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use “MANUAL CONFIGURATION” after replacing around view
>> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-359, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file” or “MANUAL CONFIGURATION” to write vehicle specifica-
tion. Refer to AV-326, "Work Procedure".
>> GO TO 4.
4.CALIBRATE CAMERA IMAGE
Perform calibration of camera image. Refer to AV-327, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW
MONITOR) : Description".
>> Work End.

CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
A
Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing around view B
Configuration has three functions as follows
Function Description C
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current around view monitor control unit.
READ CONFIGURATION
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.
D
WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual setting Writes the vehicle configuration with manual setting.
WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.
CAUTION: E
• When replacing around view monitor control unit, you must perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with
CONSULT.
• Never perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” except for new around view monitor control unit.
F
1.WRITING MODE SELECTION G

Select “CONFIGURATION” of AVM.
H
2.PERFORM “WRITE CONFIGURATION - CONFIG FILE” I
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file”. J
>> Work End. K

3.PERFORM “MANUAL CONFIGURATION”
L
Select “MANUAL CONFIGURATION” to write vehicle specifications into the around view monitor control unit.
CAUTION:
• Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. Incorrect settings may result in abnormal
control of ECU. M
• Make sure to select “NEXT” even if the default settings displayed on the CONSULT are the desired
settings. If “NEXT” is not selected, the configuration process will be incomplete.
NOTE: AV
If manual configuration items are not displayed, touch “NEXT”.
>> GO TO 4. O
4.OPERATION CHECK
Confirm that each function controlled by around view monitor control unit operates normally.
P
>> Work End.

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description
INFOID:0000000014275947
Adjust the center position of the predictive course line of the front view and rear view monitor.
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000014275948
1.DRIVING
Drive the vehicle straight ahead 100 m (328.1 ft) or more at a speed of 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) or more.
>> Work End.

CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Description
INFOID:0000000014275949
• Perform camera calibration and perform writing to the around view monitor control unit after removal/installa-
tion or replacement of each camera or camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, or others) or replace-
ment of around view monitor control unit.
• By performing this camera calibration procedure, the boundary of each camera image is aligned to the white
lines on the road near the vehicle. The boundary of each camera image may not be aligned to the white lines
far from the vehicle. The farther the line, the greater the difference is.
• Following the flow chart shown in the figure, perform calibration:
JPNIA1341GB
• For details of calibration operation, refer to AV-327, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW
MONITOR) : Work Procedure".
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000014275950
CAUTION:

When around view monitor control unit is replaced, perform the control unit setting before performing
this calibration. Refer to AV-327, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : A
Description".
1.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR SCREEN
B
Check whether or not un-match display “ ” is on screen.
Is un-match display on screen?
YES >> GO TO 2. C
NO >> GO TO 4.
E
AWNIA4432ZZ
2.CHECK WHETHER OR NOT AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT IS REPLACED

Check whether or not around view monitor control unit is replaced. F
Is around view monitor control unit replaced?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5. G
3.RELEASE UN-MATCH DISPLAY (PERFORM ONLY WHEN AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
IS REPLACED)
H
CONSULT Work Support
1. Select “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE”.
NOTE:
I
In random order, perform the operation for all cameras for which un-match display " " appears.
- Front camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (FRONT CAMERA)”
- Passenger side camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (PASS-SIDE CAMERA)”
- Driver side camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (DR-SIDE CAMERA)” J
- Rear camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (REAR CAMERA)”
2. On each camera calibration screen, press “APPLY”, and then press “OK” button.
CAUTION: K
• Never perform any operation other than selecting “APPLY” button.
• Never perform “INITIALIZE CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION”.
3. Display the around view monitor screen. Check that images are displayed normally without any difference
between images for each camera. L
Is there a malfunction such as a difference between camera images?
YES >> Calibration end.
NO >> GO TO 1. M
4.PERFORM SIMPLIFIED CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT BY “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW”
1. Put target line 1 beside each axle using packing tape, etc. AV
2. Put target line 2 at a position approximately 30 cm (11.81 in) away from each side of the vehicle (the left
and right). Check that the target line is a length equivalent to the vehicle length plus an additional approx-
imate length of 1.0 m (39.37 in) (parallel to the vehicle as much as possible).
O

Preparation of simplified target line
JSNIA0927ZZ
1. Target lines 1 2. Target lines 2

A. Approx. 30 cm (11.81 in) B. Approx. 1.0 m (39.37 in)
3. CONSULT Work Support

Select “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW”.
4. Select the left and right cameras on CONSULT screen. Perform the following calibration:
- Check that target line 1 and marker are aligned normally on screen. If difference is detected, align marker
using “+” and “–” of “AXIS X” and “AXIS Y” on CONSULT screen.
- Check that target line 2 is aligned normally on screen without difference between images of each camera.
If difference is detected, align images so that line 2 is displayed in a straight line using “+” and “–”of “AXIS
X”, “AXIS Y”, and “ROTATE” on CONSULT screen.
NOTE:
Press “SELECT” on CONSULT screen and select camera position for adjustment.
CAUTION:
• Never adjust the front camera and rear camera. Only adjust the side cameras LH/RH.
• Perform adjustment operation slowly because approximately 1 second is required for changing
image on screen.
Simplified target line adjustment method
JSNIA0929ZZ
1. Target lines 1 2. Target lines 2 3. Marker for target line 1

Crosshair cursor (mark indicated by
4. Boundary between cameras 5.
the selected camera)
Adjustment method for target lines 1 Adjustment method for target lines 2
A. B.
(right) (right)
5. Adjust the left and right cameras. Check that difference of images on screen between target line 1 and
marker, and between target lines 2 are solved. Press “APPLY”.

NOTE:
• The setting can be initialized to factory default condition using “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE” of A
Work Support.
• The adjustment value on this mode is canceled when “INITIALIZE CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION” is
performed.
B
Is the difference corrected?
YES >> • Select “OK” to end calibration.
CAUTION:
C
After selecting “OK”, never perform any operation other than “BACK” on CONSULT.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE” D
Preparation of target line
1. Hang a string with a weight as shown in the figure. Put the points FM0 and RM0 (mark) on the ground at
the center of the vehicle front end and rear end using white packing tape or a pen. E
2. Route the vinyl string under the vehicle, and then pull and fix the vinyl string at a point approximately 1.0
m (39.37 in) at the front and rear of the vehicle through points FM0 and RM0 using packing tape.
Target line preparation procedure 1 F
AV
AWNIA4433ZZ
1. Thread 2. Weight 3. Point FM0 (mark) O

4. Point RM0 (mark) 5. Packing tape (to fix the vinyl string) 6. Vinyl string
3. Put points FM and RM (mark) 75 cm (29.53 in) from the points FM0 and RM0 individually.
4. Route the vinyl string through points FM and RM using a triangle scale, and then fix it at approximately 1.5 P
m (59.06 in) on both sides with packing tape.
5. Put points FL, FR, RL, and RR (mark) at a distance of half the vehicle width, plus 30 cm (11.81 in) to the
left and right from points FM and RM.

Target line preparation procedure 2
JSNIA0921ZZ
1. Point FM 2. Point RM 3. Triangle scale

4. Point FL (mark) 5. Point FR (mark) 6. Point RL (mark)
7. Point RR (mark)
30 cm (11.81 in)
[A half of the vehicle width plus 30
A. 75 cm (29.53 in) B. Approximately 1.5 m (59.06 in) C:
cm (11.81 in) from the points FM and
RM]
6. Draw the lines of the points FL – RL and FR – RR with the vinyl string, and fix them with packing tape.
7. Put a mark at the center of front axle. Use a triangle ruler to draw a line at the position 1 m (39.37 in) back-
ward from the mark placed at the center of front axle so that the line becomes perpendicular to the line
drawn between point FL-RL and point FR-RR and fix with packing tape.
8. Put a mark at the center of rear axle. Use a triangle ruler to draw a line at the position 1 m (39.37 in) back-
ward from the mark placed at the center of rear axle so that the line becomes perpendicular to the line
drawn between point FL-RL and point FR-RR and fix with packing tape.
Target line preparation procedure 3
JSNIA6184ZZ
1. Point FL 2. Point FR 3. Point RL

4. Point RR 5. Center position of axle 6. Triangle scale
A. 1 m (39.37 in)
Perform “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE”

1. Select “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE”.
NOTE:
In random order, perform the operation for all cameras.
- Front camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (FRONT CAMERA)”

- Passenger side camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (PASS-SIDE CAMERA)”
- Driver side camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (DR-SIDE CAMERA)” A
- Rear camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (REAR CAMERA)”
2. On each calibration screen of “REAR CAMERA”, “FRONT CAMERA”, “DR-SIDE CAMERA”, and “PASS-
SIDE CAMERA”, operate “+” and “–” of “AXIS X”, “AXIS Y”, and “ROTATE” so that images on screen of
B
target line and calibration maker are aligned.
3. Press “APPLY” on CONSULT screen. “Writing...” is displayed, and then the adjustment result is displayed
on the display.
CAUTION: C
Check that “Writing...” is displayed. Never perform other operations while “Writing...” is displayed.
4. Press “APPLY” on CONSULT screen. “Writing...” is displayed, and then the adjustment result is written to
around view monitor control unit. D
CAUTION:
E
>> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW”
This mode is designed to align the boundary between each camera image that cannot be aligned in the “CAL- F
IBRATING CAMERA IMAGE” mode.
1. Select “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW”. G
2. Operate “+” and “–” of “AXIS X”, “AXIS Y”, and “ROTATE” so
that images on screen of target line on the ground and marker
are aligned between each camera.
CAUTION: H
Perform adjustment operation slowly because approxi-
mately 1 second is required for changing image on screen.
NOTE: I
Press “SELECT” on CONSULT screen and select camera posi-
tion for adjustment.
3. Press “APPLY” on CONSULT screen. “Writing...” is displayed,
J
and then the adjustment result is displayed on the display.
JSNIA5157ZZ
CAUTION:
4. Press “APPLY” on CONSULT screen. “Writing...” is displayed, and then the adjustment result is written to K
CAUTION:
• Check that “Writing...” is displayed. Never perform other operations while “Writing...” is dis- L
played.
• After selecting “OK”, never perform any operation other than “BACK” on CONSULT.
NOTE:
• The setting can be initialized to the factory default setting using “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE” of Work M
Support.
• The adjustment value on this mode is canceled when “INITIALIZE CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION” is per-
formed. AV
>> Calibration end.

O

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON
ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRA- Signal (terminal) —
U0428 TION
(Steering angle sensor calibration) Threshold —
Diagnosis delay time —
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle sensor is not complete
FAIL-SAFE
Predicted course line is not displayed
If DTC U0428 is displayed with DTC U1232, first perform the diagnosis for DTC U1232.
YES >> Proceed to AV-350, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM” using.
3. Check DTC.
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
1.ADJUST THE NEUTRAL POSITION OF THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

When U0428 is detected, adjust the neutral position of the steering angle sensor.
Perform adjustment of the neutral position of the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-67, "Work Procedure"
(VDC/TCS/ABS) or BRC-253, "Work Procedure" (FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING).
CAUTION:
For vehicles with VDC, adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on the ABS actuator control
unit side.
>> GO TO 2.
CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM” using.
4. Check DTC.

YES >> Replace steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-177, "Removal and Installation" (VDC/TCS/ABS) or A
B
AV

DESCRIPTION
control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
two communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L), allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CAN COMM CIRCUIT Signal (terminal) —

U1000
(CAN COMM CIRCUIT) Threshold —
POSSIBLE CAUSE
FAIL-SAFE
• When communication of steering angle sensor signal is not normal:
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is stopped.
• When communication of wheel speed sensor signal, and shift signal is not normal:
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is stopped.
• When communication of sonar control unit is not normal:
CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM”.
3. Check DTC.

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.
YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

NO >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
A
AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONTROL UNIT(CAN) Signal (terminal) —

U1010
[Control unit(CAN)] Threshold —
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Around view monitor control unit
FAIL-SAFE
—
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.
YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-359, "Removal and Installation".

U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A

Signal (terminal) Rear camera image signal (terminal 20)
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
U111A Rear camera image signal circuit is shorted D
(CAN COMM CIRCUIT) Threshold
or open
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Rear camera image signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE F
Camera image is not displayed (gray screen display)
G
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U111A detected? I
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End. J
K
L
1.CHECK CONTINUITY OF REAR VIEW CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and rear view camera connector B76. M
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M170 and rear view camera con-
nector B76.
AV
Around view monitor control unit Rear view camera
Continuity
O
17 1
M170 B76 Yes
18 2
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M170 and ground. P

Continuity
M170 18 No
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE OF REAR VIEW CAMERA POWER SUPPLY
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and rear view camera connector B76.
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit connector M170 and ground.
(+)
Voltage
Around view monitor control unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
“CAMERA” switch is ON or shift
position is “R”.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-359, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK CONTINUITY OF REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and rear view camera connector B76.
nector B76.

Continuity
19 5
M170 B76 Yes
20 4
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and ground.

Continuity
M170 20 No
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
3. Check signal between around view monitor control unit connector M170.

Connector
Terminal
“CAMERA” switch is ON or shift posi-

M170 20 19
tion is “R”.
JSNIA0834GB


NO >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-362, "Removal and Installation".
A
AV

U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIG- Signal (terminal) Door mirror RH signal circuit (terminal 12)
U111B NAL Door mirror RH signal circuit is open or
(Side camera right image signal) Threshold
shorted
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Side camera RH image signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U111B detected?
1.CHECK CONTINUITY OF SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror RH connector D114.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror RH connector
D114.
Around view monitor control unit Door mirror RH

Continuity
9 16
M170 D114 Yes
10 19
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M170 and ground.

Continuity
M170 10 No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE OF SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY A
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror RH connector D114.
B
(+)
Voltage C
Around view monitor control unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
“CAMERA” switch is ON or shift po- D
sition is “R”.
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK CONTINUITY OF SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
F
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror RH connector D114.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror RH connector
D114. G
Around view monitor control unit Door mirror RH

Continuity H
11 18
M170 D114 Yes
12 17 I
Around view monitor control unit J

Continuity
M170 12 No
K
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. L
4.CHECK SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror RH connector D114.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. M

AV

Connector
Terminal
O
P
M170 12 11
tion is “R”.
JSNIA0834GB


NO >> Replace side camera RH. Refer to AV-361, "Removal and Installation".

U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A

FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIG- Signal (terminal) Front view camera image signal (terminal 8)
U111C NAL Front camera image signal circuit is open or D
(Front camera image signal) Threshold
shorted
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Front camera image signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE F
G
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U111C detected? I
K
L
1.CHECK CONTINUITY OF FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and front camera connector E238. M
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M170 and front camera connector
E238.
AV
Around view monitor control unit Front camera
Continuity
O
5 2
M170 E238 Yes
6 1
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M170 and ground. P

Continuity
M170 6 No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE OF FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and front camera connector E238.
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit connector M170.

Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
M170 6 5 6.0 V
tion is “R”.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CONTINUITY OF FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and front camera connector E238.
E238.

Continuity
7 4
M170 E238 Yes
8 3

Continuity
M170 8 No
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and front camera connector E238.

Connector
Terminal

M170 8 7
tion is “R”.
JSNIA0834GB


NO >> Replace front camera. Refer to AV-360, "Removal and Installation".
A
AV

U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIG- Signal (terminal) Side camera LH image signal (terminal 16)
U111D NAL Side camera LH image signal circuit is open
(Side camera left image signal) Threshold
or shorted
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Side camera LH image signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U111D detected?
1.CHECK CONTINUITY OF SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror LH connector D12.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror LH connector
D12.
Around view monitor control unit Door mirror LH

Continuity
13 16
M170 D12 Yes
14 19
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and ground.
Around view control module

Continuity
M170 14 No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE OF SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY A
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror LH connector D12.
B

Voltage C
(+) (−) Condition
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
“CAMERA” switch is ON or shift D
M170 14 13 6.0 V
position is “R”.
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK CONTINUITY OF SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
F
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror LH connector D12.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror LH connector
D12. G
Around view monitor control unit Door mirror LH

Continuity H
15 18
M170 D12 Yes
16 17 I
Around view monitor control unit J

Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
M170 16 No
K
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. L
4.CHECK SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror LH connector D12.

AV

Connector
Terminal
O
P
M170 16 15
tion is “R”.
JSNIA0834GB


NO >> Replace side camera LH. Refer to AV-361, "Removal and Installation".

A

ST ANGLE SEN CALIB Signal (terminal) —

U1232
(Steering angle sensor calibration) Threshold — D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
FAIL-SAFE F
Predictive course line is not displayed
G
CONSULT
2. Select “Self diagnostic result” mode of “AVM”.
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1232 detected? I
1.ADJUST THE PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION OF THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR K
Adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on ABS actuator and electrical unit (control unit) side. Refer
to BRC-67, "Work Procedure" (VDC/TCS/ABS) or BRC-253, "Work Procedure" (FORWARD EMERGENCY
L
BRAKING).
NOTE:
When DTC U1232 is detected, adjust the predictive course line center position of the steering angle sensor.
M
>> GO TO 2.
CONSULT
2. Erase DTC. O
3. Select “Self diagnostic result” mode of “AVM”.
4. Check DTC.
P

U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Signal (terminal) Camera power supply circuits
CAMERA POWER VOLT
U1302 Camera power supply voltage is 5.9 V-6.5 V
(Camera power voltage) Threshold
when ON, or 0 V when OFF
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Camera power supply output circuit
• Around view monitor control unit
FAIL-SAFE
Camera power output is stopped
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
1.CHECK CAMERA DATA MONITOR

Check CAMERA IMAGE SIG for each camera in “Data Monitor” of “AVM”.
Is “OK” displayed for all cameras?
YES >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-1 (Front camera)>>GO TO 2.
NO-2 (Rear view camera)>>GO TO 4.
NO-3 (LH side camera)>>GO TO 6.
NO-4 (RH side camera)>>GO TO 8.
2.CHECK FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND POWER SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and front camera connector E238.
E238.

Continuity

6 1
M170 E238 Yes A
5 2
B
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M170 6 — No C
YES >> GO TO 3.
D
3.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and front camera connector E238. E
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit connector M170 terminals.
F
Around view monitor control unit M170
Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal G
CAMERA switch is ON or shift
6 5 6.2 V
position is R.
H
YES >> Replace front camera. Refer to AV-360, "Removal and Installation".
I
4.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND POWER SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINU-
ITY
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and rear view camera connector B76.
nector B76.
K

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal L
18 2
M170 B76 Yes
17 1
M

Ground Continuity AV
Connector Terminal
M170 18 — No
Is the inspection result normal? O
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE P


Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
18 17 6.2 V
position is R.
YES >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-362, "Removal and Installation".
6.CHECK LH SIDE CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND POWER SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and LH side camera connector D12.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M170 and LH side camera connec-
tor D12.
Around view monitor control unit LH side camera

Continuity
14 19
M170 D12 Yes
13 16

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M170 14 — No
YES >> GO TO 7.
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and LH side camera connector D12.

Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
14 13 6.2 V
position is R.
YES >> Replace LH side camera. Refer to AV-361, "Removal and Installation".
8.CHECK RH SIDE CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND POWER SUPPLY GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and RH side camera connector D114.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit connector M170 and RH side camera connec-
tor D114.
Around view monitor control unit RH side camera

Continuity

10 19
M170 D114 Yes A
9 16
B
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M170 10 — No C
YES >> GO TO 9.
D
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and RH side camera connector D114. E
F
Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal G
10 9 6.2 V
position is R.
H
YES >> Replace LH side camera. Refer to AV-361, "Removal and Installation".
I
AV

U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CAMERA IMAGE CALIB Signal (terminal) —

U1304
(Camera image calibration) Threshold —
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Camera calibration is incomplete
FAIL-SAFE
Unmatched icon display (red) is displayed (applicable for unmatched camera only)
CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
1.PERFORM CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE

Perform camera calibration. Refer to AV-327, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)
: Description".
>> GO TO 2.
CONSULT
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.
YES >> Replace malfunctioning camera.

U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH
U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH
A

CONFIG UNFINISH Signal (terminal) —

U1305
(Configuration unfinish) Threshold — D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
The vehicle setting of around view monitor control unit is incomplete
FAIL-SAFE
Operation is according to the vehicle setting value as default value F

CONSULT
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM”. H
3. Check DTC.
YES >> Proceed to AV-356, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
J
1.PERFORM CONFIGURATION OF AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT K

Perform configuration of around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-326, "Work Procedure".
>> GO TO 2. L
CONSULT M
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC. AV
NO >> Inspection End. O

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.
Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.

40 Ignition signal 30 (10A)
Are the fuses blown?
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170.
Around view monitor control unit Voltage

Ground Condition
M170 40 — Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M170 39 — Yes

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
B

C
Symptom Check items Probable malfunction location
“AVM” is not displayed on the system selection screen of power supply circuit
D
CONSULT. • BAT power supply circuit
Screen is not switched to camera • Ignition power supply circuit
image when CAMERA button is
pressed and when shift position Check that the following Data Camera switch signal and
Around view monitor control unit E
is shifted to the reverse position. Monitor items operate nor- reverse signal are normal.
mally using CONSULT:
• Camera switch signal Camera switch signal or re-
CAN communication circuit
• Reverse signal verse signal is not normal.
F
Camera image signal circuit
Refer to AV-338, "Diagnosis Proce-
Screen is switched when press- Only superimposing is displayed (only images that AV con- dure", AV-341, "Diagnosis Proce-
ing camera button or shifting se- trol unit plots are displayed). dure", AV-344, "Diagnosis G
lector lever to the reverse Procedure", AV-347, "Diagnosis
position; however, all views are Procedure".
not displayed.
AV control unit H
Superimposing is not displayed.
Refer to AV-323, "Work Flow".
The screen is not switched to the
rear view image even if the selec-
The front view is displayed normally. Reverse signal circuit. I
tor is shifted to the reverse posi-
tion.
• Front view screen is not dis- Check the following Data Front camera power supply circuit
played. Monitor items using CON- and image signal circuit J
• Image signal: NG
• Front of top view screen is not SULT: Refer to AV-344, "Diagnosis Proce-
displayed. • Front camera image signal dure".
• The rear view screen is not dis- Check the following Data Rear camera power supply circuit K
played. Monitor items using CON- and image signal circuit
• Image signal: NG
• Rear of top view screen is not SULT: Refer to AV-338, "Diagnosis Proce-
displayed. • Rear camera image signal dure".
L
Check the following Data
• The side view screen is not dis- Side camera LH power supply cir-
Monitor items using CON-
played. cuit and image signal circuit
SULT: • Image signal: NG
• Left side of top view screen is Refer to AV-347, "Diagnosis Proce-
• Side camera LH image sig- M
not displayed. dure".
nal
Check the following Data
Monitor items using CON- Side camera RH power supply cir-
Right side of top view image is AV
SULT: • Image signal: NG cuit and image signal circuit. Refer
not displayed.
• Side camera RH image to AV-341, "Diagnosis Procedure".
signal
O

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

ALNIA1753ZZ
1. Around view monitor control unit Front
REMOVAL
NOTE:
Before replacing around view monitor control unit, perform “Before Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configura-
tion” to save or print current vehicle specification. Refer to AV-325, "Description".
1. Remove center console finisher (RH). Refer to IP-20, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect the harness connector (B) from the around view
monitor control unit (1).
3. Remove clip (A) and bolts (C) and remove around view monitor
control unit.
ALNIA1762ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Be sure to perform “After Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration” or “Manual Configuration”
when replacing around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-325, "Description".
• Perform the calibration and perform the writing to the around view monitor control unit when remov-
ing and replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.)
and replacing the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-327, "CALIBRATING CAMERA
IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Description".
NOTE:
Perform predictive course line center position adjustment. Refer to AV-327, "PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE
CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description".

FRONT CAMERA
FRONT CAMERA
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove core support cover. Refer to EXT-16, "Exploded View".
2. Remove condenser air deflector. Refer to HA-41, "CONDENSER : Exploded View".
C
3. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from the front camera.
(1) : Hood lock

: Front D
F
ALNIA1756ZZ
4. Remove screws (A) and remove front camera (1).

G
: Front
ALNIA1757ZZ
J
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Perform the calibration and perform the writing to the around view monitor control unit when remov- K
and replacing the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-327, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE
(AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Description". L
AV

SIDE CAMERA
SIDE CAMERA
REMOVAL
1. Remove door mirror rear finisher. Refer to MIR-24, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from the side camera.
3. Remove screw (B) and release pawls to remove side camera
finisher (1).
: Pawl
ALNIA1759ZZ
4. Remove screw (A) and remove side camera (1).
ALNIA1758ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Perform the calibration and perform the writing to the around view monitor control unit when remov-
(AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Description".

REAR CAMERA
REAR CAMERA
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove license lamp finisher. Refer to EXT-40, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove trunk lid finisher. Refer to INT-52, "TRUNK LID FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
C
3. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from the rear camera (1).
: Front
D
F
ALNIA1761ZZ
4. Release pawl then remove rear camera (1).

G
: Pawl
: Front
H
ALNIA1760ZZ
J
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
AV

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
see the SR section.
ness connectors.
WARNING:
CAUTION:
Remove battery terminal, and AV control unit after a lapse of 30 seconds or more after turning the igni-
tion switch OFF.
NOTE:
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the AV control unit continues operating for approximately 30 sec-
onds.


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
PKIA0306E
D
G
PKIA0307E

H
- Oily dirt:
area.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(TechMate No.)
Tool name
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

PIIB1407E

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
COMPONENT PARTS
B
I
AWNIA4094ZZ
No. Component Function J

1. Rear view camera Refer to AV-367, "Rear View Camera".
K
3. Steering angle sensor Refer to AV-367, "Steering Angle Sensor".
L
• AV control unit is located in the center of the instrument panel
assembly.
• Rear view monitor display and camera controller are integral to the
AV control unit. M
AV
O
ALNIA1763ZZ

COMPONENT PARTS
Rear View Camera INFOID:0000000014275989
• The rear view camera is installed next to the rear license plate
lamp.
• Power for the camera is supplied from the AV control unit and the
image at the rear of the vehicle is displayed on the AV control unit
display.
JSNIA6012ZZ
Steering Angle Sensor INFOID:0000000014275990
• Steering angle sensor is installed to the spiral cable.

• Steering angle sensor sends the steering signal necessary for pre-
dictive course line of the rear view to the AV control unit via CAN
communication.
JSNIA1571ZZ

SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
AWNIA4435GB E
DESCRIPTION
Operation Description F
• When the selector lever is shifted to the reverse position, the rear view monitor image is displayed.
• When the selector lever is shifted to any position other than the reverse position, the original image (the
image displayed before the rear view monitor image) is displayed.
G
Camera Image Operation Principle
• The AV control unit receives the reverse signal input and supplies power to the rear view camera.
• The AV control unit displays the rear view camera image when the reverse signal is received.
H
• The AV control unit generates the warning message, vehicle width guide lines and the predicted course lines
on the image from the rear view camera.
Vehicle Width Guide Lines and Predicted Course Lines Display Function of Rear View Monitor Display
I
• The vehicle width guide lines and the predicted course lines that indicate the vehicle route according to the
steering angle are displayed on the rear view monitor display to allow the driver to more easily judge dis-
tances between the vehicle and objects and help the driver back into a parking space.
• The AV control unit receives the steering signal from the steering sensor via CAN communication and draws J
a vehicle width guide line according to the steering angle.
• When the vehicle width guide lines are displayed, the vehicle width guide lines are displayed translucently.
• The predicted course lines are not displayed when the steering angle is in the neutral position. K
AV
P
JSNIA3994GB

MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE)
MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE) : Description INFOID:0000000014347149
Mode Description
meter).
tion switch).
Self Diagnosis
- between Control Unit (AV control unit) and Amplifier (Bose speaker
amp.).
- between Control Unit (AV control unit) and TCU (Telematics control
unit).

Mode Description
A
Display Diagnosis • Touch Panel: B
C
Vehicle Signals
D
AV COMM Diagnosis The communication condition of system components can be monitored. E
sanConnect Services
• ### Voice Microphone Test. F
• Maintenance.
Confirmation/Adjustment The following functions are available: G

Camera
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history. H
• Factory Configuration Data Initialization. I
J
Speaker Test
tones.
• Status. K
• Active Test. L
M
display anything.
MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE) : On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000014347150 AV
METHOD OF STARTING
1. Turn the ignition ON. O

ALNIA1766ZZ
clicks.
ALNIA1767ZZ
be selected.
SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE
diagnosis.

Normal Green Green
1 Red Green
Unit malfunction


Cluster
IT-Commander
H
ground circuits. Refer to AV-121, "BOSE
SPEAKER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure".
Malfunction is detected in Bose speaker
Amplifier
amp. power supply and ground circuits.
• If no malfunction is detected in Bose I
speaker amp. power supply and ground
circuits, replace Bose speaker amp. Re-
fer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation".
J
• TCU power supply and ground circuits.
Malfunction is detected in TCU power sup- • If no malfunction is detected in TCU pow-
TCU
ply and ground circuits. er supply and ground circuits, replace K
TCU. Refer to AV-459, "Removal and In-
stallation".
L
M
functioning.
AV
AV communication circuits between combi-
AV communication circuits. Refer to AV-
102, "DTC Description".
functioning.
AV communication circuits between AV O
Control Unit ⇔ Amplifier control unit and Bose speaker amp. are
malfunctioning.
Satellite radio antenna connection malfunc- Satellite radio antenna disconnected. Refer P
GPS antenna connection malfunction is de- GPS antenna connector disconnected. Re-
AV communication circuits between AV AV communication circuits. Refer to AV-
Control Unit ⇔ TCU
control unit and TCU are malfunctioning. 102, "DTC Description".

1. Select Confirmation/Adjustment.
MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE) : CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000014347151
CONSULT FUNCTIONS

Configuration
ECU IDENTIFICATION
DATA MONITOR

line.
WORK SUPPORT
formed.
CONFIGURATION
MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE)
MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE) : Description INFOID:0000000014347146

Mode Description A
B
meter).
Self Diagnosis
tion switch).
- between Control Unit (AV control unit) and XM antenna. C
D
Display Diagnosis • Touch Panel:
- Touch Panel Response Check. E
Vehicle Signals
F
G
AV COMM Diagnosis The communication condition of system components can be monitored.

The following functions are available: H
• ### Voice Microphone Test.
sanConnect Services
• Maintenance.
• Bluetooth Device Information. I
Confirmation/Adjustment The following functions are available:
Camera
J
The following functions are available: K
• Factory Configuration Data Initialization.
L
Speaker Test
tones.
M
• Status.
• Connection Diagnosis. AV
• Active Test.
SXM • Diagnostic Mode Display. O
display anything. P
MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE) : On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000014347147
METHOD OF STARTING

ALNIA1766ZZ
clicks.
ALNIA1767ZZ
be selected.
SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE
diagnosis.

Normal Green Green
1 Red Green
Unit malfunction


Cluster
IT-Commander
H

I

functioning. AV communication circuits. Refer to AV-
J
AV communication circuits between combi- 245, "DTC Description".
functioning. K
GPS antenna connection malfunction is de- GPS antenna connector disconnected. Re- L

1. Select Confirmation/Adjustment. M
AV
MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE) : CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000014347148
CONSULT FUNCTIONS O

P

Configuration
ECU IDENTIFICATION
DATA MONITOR

line.
WORK SUPPORT
formed.
CONFIGURATION

AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

AV CONTROL UNIT
MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE)
B
MULTI AV (NAVI WITH BOSE) : Reference Value INFOID:0000000014275998
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL C

Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH). Off D
VHCL SPD SIG
ILLUM SIG E
IGN SIG
Ignition switch ON. On F
REV SIG
G
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA3814ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES M
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value AV
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
O
Sound signal LH Output P
(G) (R) • Sound output
SKIB3609E
4 5
Voice guidance signal — — —
(B) (W)

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
7
(P)
9 8
(R) (GR)
10
— Sound signal shield — — —
(Shield)
Sound signal RH Output
SKIB3609E
19
(G)
21 Input/
(LG) output
22 Input/
(SB) output
23 Input/
(LG) output
24 Input/
(SB) output
25 Input/
— CAN low — —
(P) output
26 Input/
(L) output
NOTE:
(destination unit).
Ignition switch ON
(BG) pulse)
km/h (25 MPH)
JSNIA0012GB

30 —
(G) 0V
than R (reverse)
31
(BG)
32
(P)
— Output — —
(LG) tion output
381 — Sound signal shield — — —

(Shield)

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
391 401 Sound signal Input Sound input into the microphone C
(W) (B)
SKIB3609E D
E
46
48
(B)1 Microphone signal Input While speaking into the microphone
(Shield)
(W)2
F
SKIB3609E
2
47 — Microphone power supply — — 5.0 V G
(B)
H
Input
I
SKIB3609E

Input K
SKIB3609E L
52
(Shield)
57
M
(R)
AV
59
58 Ignition switch ON
(B)3 Camera image signal Input
(B) • Image is displayed.
(W)4 O
SKIB0827E
60 P
(Shield)
1
: With telematics
2: Without telematics
3
: With around view monitor
4: With rear view monitor

AV CONTROL UNIT
MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE)
MULTI AV (NAVI WITHOUT BOSE) : Reference Value INFOID:0000000014275999

VHCL SPD SIG
ILLUM SIG
IGN SIG
REV SIG
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA3814ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Sound signal front LH Output
SKIB3609E D
E
Sound signal rear LH Output
(LG) (Y) • Sound output
F
SKIB3609E
7
Ground ACC power supply Input Ignition switch ACC Battery voltage G
(P)
9 8
(R) (GR)
H
11 12 Ignition switch ON I
Sound signal front RH Output
(P) (SB) • Sound output
J
SKIB3609E
K
Sound signal rear RH Output
L
SKIB3609E
19 M
(G)
21 Input/
(LG) output
AV
22 Input/
(SB) output
23 Input/
— AV communication low — — O
(LG) output
24 Input/
(SB) output
P
25 Input/
— CAN low — —
(P) output
26 Input/
(L) output

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
NOTE:
(destination unit).
Ignition switch ON
(BG) pulse)
km/h (25 MPH)
JSNIA0012GB

30 —
(G) 0V
than R (reverse)
31
(BG)
32
(P)
— Output — —
(LG) tion output
46 48
Microphone signal Input While speaking into the microphone
(W) (Shield)
SKIB3609E
47
— Microphone power supply — — 5.0 V
(B)

Input
SKIB3609E

Input
SKIB3609E
52
(Shield)
57
(R)

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Camera image signal Input
(W) (B) • Image is displayed.
SKIB0827E D
60
(Shield)
E
AV

REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
WIRING DIAGRAM
ABNWA3247GB

AV
ABNIA9663GB

ABNIA9664GB

AV
ABNIA9665GB

ABNIA9666GB

AV
ABNIA9667GB

ABNIA9668GB

< BASIC INSPECTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
JSNIA4482GB M
• Reference 1: Refer to AV-28, "CONSULT Function" (MULTI AV NAVI WITH BOSE) or AV-198, "CONSULT
Function" (MULTI AV NAVI WITHOUT BOSE). AV
DETAILED FLOW
O
tion occurred).
YES >> GO TO 2.
< BASIC INSPECTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
1. Connect CONSULT and perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-28, "CONSULT Function"
(MULTI AV NAVI WITH BOSE) or AV-198, "CONSULT Function" (MULTI AV NAVI WITHOUT BOSE).
NOTE:
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC list.
>> GO TO 5.
Table".
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT.
NOTE:
has been indicated in the “Self Diagnostic Result”.
YES >> GO TO 1.

REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-385, "Wiring Diagram". C
1.CHECK REVERSE INPUT SIGNAL D

2. Shift the selector lever to R (reverse).
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M163 (with Bose audio system) or M161 (without Bose
E
audio system) and ground.
AV control unit Ground

Voltage F
(+) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M163 (with Bose audio sys- (−) G
tem)
30 Selector lever is in “R”. Battery Voltage
M161 (without Bose audio
system) H
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M163 (with Bose audio system) or M161 (without Bose audio sys-
tem) and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M163 (with Bose audio system) or M161 (without
Bose audio system) and rear view camera connector B76. K
AV control unit Rear view camera

Continuity L
M163 (with Bose audio sys-
tem)
57 B76 2 Yes M
M161 (without Bose audio sys-
tem)
AV
Bose audio system) and ground.
AV control unit
Continuity O
Connector Terminal
M163 (with Bose audio system) Ground
M161 (without Bose audio sys- 57 No P

tem)
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE

1. Connect AV control unit connector M163 (with Bose audio system) or M161 (without Bose audio system)
and rear view camera connector.
3. Shift the selector lever to R (reverse).
4. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M163 (with Bose audio system) or M161 (without Bose
audio system) nd ground.
AV control unit Ground

Voltage
(+) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M163 (with Bose audio sys- (−)
tem)
57 Selector lever is in “R”. 6.0 V
system)
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M163 (with Bose audio system) or M161 (without Bose audio sys-
tem) and rear view camera connector.
Bose audio system) and rear view camera connector B76.

Continuity
tem)
59 B76 4 Yes
system)
Bose audio system) and ground.
AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal
M163 (with Bose audio system) Ground
M161 (without Bose audio sys- 59 No

tem)
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK CAMERA GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M163 (with Bose audio system) or M161 (without Bose
audio system) and rear view camera connector B76.

Continuity
tem)
58 B76 1 Yes
system)

YES >> GO TO 6. A
6.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
B
1. Connect AV control unit connector M163 (with Bose audio system) or M161 (without Bose audio system)
and rear view camera connector.
3. Shift the selector lever to R (reverse). C
4. Check signal between AV control unit connector M163 (with Bose audio system) or M161 (without Bose
audio system) and ground.
D
AV control unit connector M163 (with Bose audio system) or
M161 (without Bose audio system)
Condition Reference value
(+) (–) E
Terminal Terminal
59 58 Camera image displayed.

G
SKIB2251J
H
NO >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-400, "Removal and Installation".
I
AV

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
REAR VIEW MONITOR

Reverse signal circuit malfunction between
Reverse signal circuit malfunction. BCM and AV control unit.
Camera image signal circuit malfunction
between rear view camera and AV control
Rear view camera is inoperative. Camera image signal circuit malfunction.
unit.
Replace rear view camera.
Rear view camera malfunction. Refer to AV-400, "Removal and Installa-
tion".

AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

AV CONTROL UNIT
B
AWIIA2142ZZ J
K

L
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
NOTE:
O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

AV CONTROL UNIT

REAR VIEW CAMERA
REAR VIEW CAMERA
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove license lamp finisher. Refer to EXT-40, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove trunk lid finisher. Refer to INT-52, "TRUNK LID FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
C
3. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from the rear camera (1).
: Front
D
F
ALNIA1761ZZ
4. Release pawl then remove rear camera (1).

G
: Pawl
: Front
H
ALNIA1760ZZ
J
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
AV

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
see the SR section.
ness connectors.
WARNING:
CAUTION:
after turning the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
PKIA0306E
D
G
PKIA0307E

H
- Oily dirt:
area.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(TechMate No.)
Tool name
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

PIIB1407E

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
COMPONENT PARTS
B
AV
AWNIA4430ZZ
P
1. TEL antenna Refer to AV-405, "Telematics Antenna".
2. TCU Refer to AV-405, "TCU".
4. Microphone Refer to AV-406, "Microphone".
5. Telematics switch Refer to AV-406, "Telematics Switch".

COMPONENT PARTS

• AV control unit controls the audio system of Multi AV system.
communication.
ALNIA1763ZZ
TCU INFOID:0000000014276016
• Telematics Communication Unit (TCU) is installed on the steering

member.
• A radio communication terminal and SIM card are built into the unit
and data is sent and received in SMS*, DTMF tone signal with the
NISSANCONNECTSM center through the TEL antenna.
NOTE:
*: SMS stands for Short Message Service. It is also referred to as
Text Messaging, Short Mail, etc. is the service that performs text
based message communication.
• It is connected to the AV control unit with the USB harness for
sound signal input/output and USB communication. JSNIA7225ZZ
• It is connected to the airbag diagnosis sensor unit via CAN com-

munication. TCU performs an emergency report when the air bag is inflated.
• VIN information necessary for the Telematics service is memorized.
• Audio signals received during SOS/Operator call are transmitted from TCU to each speaker via the AV con-
trol unit.
• During the communication with NISSANCONNECTSM center, TCU transmits a TEL ON signal to the AV con-
trol unit to prohibit the use of Bluetooth® hands-free phone.
Telematics Antenna INFOID:0000000014276017
• The telematics antenna consists of TEL antenna and GPS antenna.

• It is installed in the instrument panel.
NOTE:
The placement of an object on the instrument panel may cause
desensitization in the receiver sensitivity.
JSNIA5830ZZ

COMPONENT PARTS
Telematics Switch INFOID:0000000014276018
A
• The Telematics switch is located on the map lamp assembly.
• The Telematics switch is connected to TCU and transmits an oper-
ation signal. B
• The state of LED (ON/Blink/OFF) shows the status of SOS call.
LED ON :SOS Call available

LED Blink :SOS Call in communication C
LED OFF :Out of service area or system error
D
JSNIA5899ZZ
Microphone INFOID:0000000014276019
E
• Microphone is installed on the map lamp assembly.
• The microphone is used for the operation of the NISSANCON-
NECTSM, hands-free phone system, voice recognition function. F
• The power is supplied from the TCU to the microphone, transmit-
ting sound signals to the TCU during operation of the NISSAN-
CONNECTSM system, hands-free phone communication, and G
voice recognition.
H
JSNIA6009ZZ
AV

SYSTEM
SYSTEM
TELEMATICS SYSTEM
TELEMATICS SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000014276020
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
AWNIA4436GB
DESCRIPTION
• The Telematics system is a system for providing information by connecting the vehicle and the user to the
NISSANCONNECTSM center.
• Telematics Communication Unit (TCU) equipped with a radio communication terminal communicates with
the information center (NISSANCONNECTSM center) via radio waves for receiving NISSANCONNECTSM
services.
• With the equipment of the radio communication terminal, TCU communicates with NISSANCONNECTSM
center by Packet communication*1 and SMS*2 via TEL antenna.
NOTE:
• *1: Packet communication means a communication method that data is broken down into smaller chunks
for communication. The split data is called a packet and improves the efficiency of the communication cir-
cuit.
• *2: SMS stands for Short Message Service, also known as text messaging or short mail, and provides text-
based message communication services.
• While communicating with the operator, data (e.g. transmission of own vehicle location) is transmitted to the
NISSANCONNECTSM Service Center by using DTMF tone signals and SMS via the radio communication
module included in TCU.
• Audio signals transmitted and received while communicating with the operator are input by microphone con-
nected to TCU.
• Audio signals are output from TCU via the audio data circuit connected to the AV control unit.
TELEMATICS SYSTEM : Fail-safe INFOID:0000000014276021
If a malfunction occurs in the telematics system, TCU performs fail-safe activation according to the detected
malfunction.

SYSTEM
Detection item Telematics system operation in fail-safe mode DTC A

• Some telematics systems do not function.
Air-bag connection U1A10
• Inform the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center about the abnormality.
• Telematics system does not function. B
CAN communication SM U1000
• Inform the NISSANCONNECTION Data Center about the abnormality.
AV communication B13E1 C
• Telematics switch LED indicator turned OFF.
(LED indicator flashes 10 times when the SOS call switch is pressed.)
TEL antenna U1A06 D
• Call the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center and inform them that the telematics
system cannot be connected.
• Telematics system cannot send correct positional information. U1A09
GPS antenna
• Inform the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center about the abnormality. U1A0A E
• Telematics system does not function.
USB communication B13D9
B1310
F
B130D
Telematics system function stops. B2EF0
U1010 G
TCU U1A01
• Telematics system function stops.
U1A03
• Call the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center and inform them that the telematics U1A11 H
Telematics switch • Telematics system does not function. (Only SOS call does not operate.) B2E33
(SOS call switch) • Telematics switch LED indicator turn OFF. U1A0E
I
• Transmit an own vehicle position to the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center. U1A0B
Microphone
• Inform the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center about abnormality. U1A0C
VIN Telematics service does not function. U1A04 J
AV

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCU)
CONSULT FUNCTIONS
CONSULT performs the following functions via communication with the TCU.

ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of TCU is displayed.
DATA MONITOR

HF TYPE [BT/NO BT] HF type is displayed.
AUDIO UNIT TYPE [AUDIO/NAVI] AV control unit type is displayed.
CALL SWITCH TYPE [SOS/OP] Call switch type is displayed.
SPEAKER TYPE [INDRCT] Speaker type is displayed.
ZONE [USA] Zone is displayed.
CHANNEL [NISSAN] Channel is displayed.
CAN COMM [GEN.3] CAN comm is displayed.
AV COMM [ENABLE/DISABLE] AV comm is displayed.
K-LINE [ENABLE/DISABLE] K-Line is displayed.
VEHICLE TYPE [ENG] Vehicle type is displayed.
ECHO CANCEL [TYPE 1/TYPE 2/TYPE 3/TYPE 4] Echo cancel type is displayed.
NOISE CANCEL [TYPE 1/TYPE 2/TYPE 3/TYPE 4] Noise cancel type is displayed.
TCU STANDBY TIME [2DAYS/14DAYS/30DAYS] TCU standby time is displayed.
SENSOR ANGLE X —
SENSOR ANGLE Y —
SENSOR ANGLE Z —
SVTB —
REMOTE DOOR LOCK [ENABLE/DISABLE] Remote door lock is displayed.
REMOTE HORN & LAMP [ENABLE/DISABLE] Remote horn and lamp is displayed.
REMOTE START [ENABLE/DISABLE] Remote start is displayed.
NAD OUTPUT STATUS [On/Off] TCU activation is displayed.
ACN COMM SEQUENCE LOG [1–255] ACN communication sequence log is displayed.
SOS COMM SEQUENCE LOG [1–10] SOS communication sequence log is displayed.
SOS SW [ON/OFF] SOS switch is displayed.
WORK SUPPORT

Conditions Description A
SAVE VIN DATA VIN data saved in TCU is stored in CONSULT.
CENTER CONNECTION SETTING Connection to Nissan ConnectSM Data Center can be set.
B
Off: TCU activation Off.
TCU ACTIVATE SETTING
On: TCU activation On.
WRITE VIN (SAVED DATA) VIN data from SAVE VIN DATA can be written to new TCU. C
WRITE VIN (MANUAL INPUT) VIN data can be manually written to new TCU.

D
AV

TCU
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]

TCU

HF TYPE BT
AUDIO UNIT TYPE NAVI
CALL SWITCH TYPE SOS
SPEAKER TYPE INDRCT
ZONE USA
CHANNEL NISSAN
Ignition switch ON
CAN COMM GEN.3
AV COMM ENABLE
K-LINE DISABLE
VEHICLE TYPE ENG
ECHO CANCEL TYPE1
NOISE CANCEL TYPE1
Set at 14 days (default) 14DAYS
Set at 2 days 2DAYS
TCU STANDBY TIME
Set at 30 days 30DAYS
No setting NON
SENSOR ANGLE X 4.0
SENSOR ANGLE Y 4.0
SENSOR ANGLE Z 4.0
SVTB Ignition switch ON DISABLE
REMOTE DOOR LOCK DISABLE
REMOTE HORN & LAMP DISABLE
REMOTE START DISABLE
When TCU activation is ON On
NAD OUTPUT STATUS
When TCU activation is OFF Off
ACN COMM SEQUENCE LOG — —
SOS COMM SEQUENCE LOG — —
SOS switch pressed On
SOS SW
SOS switch released Off
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA4097ZZ

TCU
PHYSICAL VALUES
A
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) B
+ – Signal name
Output
1 29
Battery power supply Input Ignition switch OFF Battery Voltage
(W) (B) C
2 29
ACC power supply Input Ignition switch ACC Battery Voltage
(P) (B)
3 29 D
ACC power supply Output Ignition switch ACC Battery Voltage
(P) (B)
Ignition switch ACC
• When SOS switch LED is not illu- Battery Voltage
E
5 28 SOS switch LED sig- minated
Input
(R) (B) nal Ignition switch ACC
• When SOS switch LED is illumi- 0V
nated F
6 Input/
(L) Output
7 Input/ G
— CAN low — —
(P) Output
10 29
Ignition signal Input Ignition switch ON Battery Voltage H
(BG) (B)
11
— Microphone shield — — —
(Shield)
I
12 11 Ignition switch ACC J

Microphone signal Output
(B) (Shield) • When interior sound is input
SKIB3609E K
16
— Microphone ground — — —
(Shield)
L
17 16
Microphone signal Input
Ignition switch ACC M
(W) (Shield) • When interior sound is input
SKIB3609E
AV
18 16
Microphone VCC Input Ignition switch ACC 5V
(B) (Shield)
O
26 AV communication Input/
— — —
(SB) high Output
27 AV communication Input/
— — — P
(LG) low Output
28
Ground Ground — Ignition switch ON 0V
(B)
29
Ground Ground — Ignition switch ON 0V
(B)

TCU
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
31 32 Ignition switch ACC

Sound signal (+) Output
(W) (B) • When interior sound is input
SKIB3609E
Ignition switch ACC

0V
37 28 • When pressing SOS switch
SOS call switch signal Input
(BG) (B) Ignition switch ACC
5V
• When SOS switch is released
41
(B)
43 Input/
— D- signal — —
(G) Output
44 Input/
— D+ signal — —
(W) Output
45
— ground Input — —
(R)
46
— Shield — — —
(Shield)
47 TEL antenna connector disconnect-
Ground TEL antenna signal Input 2.8 V
(B) ed
48
(Shield)
49 GPS antenna connector disconnect-
Ground GPS antenna signal Input 2.8 V
(B) ed
50
(Shield)
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000014276024
If a malfunction occurs in the telematics system, TCU performs fail-safe activation according to the detected
malfunction.
Detection item Telematics system operation in fail-safe mode DTC

Air-bag connection U1A10
CAN communication U1000
AV communication B13E1
• Telematics switch LED indicator turned OFF.
(LED indicator flashes 10 times when the SOS call switch is pressed.)
TEL antenna U1A06
• Call the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center and inform them that the telematics
• Telematics system cannot send correct positional information. U1A09
GPS antenna
• Inform the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center about the abnormality. U1A0A
USB communication B13D9

TCU
Detection item Telematics system operation in fail-safe mode DTC
A
B1310
B130D
Telematics system function stops. B2EF0
U1010 B
TCU U1A01
• Telematics system function stops.
U1A03
• Call the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center and inform them that the telematics U1A11 C
Telematics switch • Telematics system does not function. (Only SOS call does not operate.) B2E33
(SOS call switch) • Telematics switch LED indicator turn OFF. U1A0E
D
• Transmit an own vehicle position to the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center. U1A0B
Microphone
• Inform the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center about abnormality. U1A0C
VIN Telematics service does not function. U1A04 E
If multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check them one by one depending on the following DTC inspec- F
Priority Detected items (DTC) G

1 U1A04: VIN UNFINISHED
2 H
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
• B130D: TEL LINE OUT ERROR
• B1310: TCU TEMPERATURE ERROR
• B13D9: USB CONNECTION I
• B13E1: CAN COMMUNICATION
• B2E33: ECALL BUTTON
• B2EF0: INTERNAL BATTERY
• U1A00: ACC not connected J
• U1A01: INTERNAL ERROR (TCU)
3 • U1A03: SIM CARD
• U1A06: TEL ANTENNA
• U1A09: GPS ANTENNA CONN
K
• U1A0A: GPS MODULE COMM
• U1A0B: MIC IN CONN
• U1A0C: MIC OUT CONN L
• U1A0E: SOS SWITCH ON STUCK
• U1A10: AIRBAG SIGNAL
• U1A11: TEL MUTE OUTPUT SIGNAL NO CONN
M
AV
DTC Display contents of CONSULT Reference
B130D TEL LINE OUT ERROR AV-425, "DTC Description"
B1310 TCU TEMPERATURE ERROR AV-427, "DTC Description" O
B13D9 USB CONNECTION AV-428, "DTC Description"
B13E1 CAN COMMUNICATION AV-429, "DTC Description"
B2E33 ECALL BUTTON AV-430, "DTC Description"
P
B2EF0 INTERNAL BATTERY AV-432, "DTC Description"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) AV-435, "DTC Description"
U1A00 ACC not connected AV-436, "DTC Description"
U1A01 INTERNAL ERROR (TCU) AV-437, "DTC Description"

TCU
DTC Display contents of CONSULT Reference
U1A03 SIM CARD AV-438, "DTC Description"
U1A04 VIN UNFINISHED AV-439, "DTC Description"
U1A06 TEL ANTENNA AV-440, "DTC Description"
U1A09 GPS ANTENNA CONN AV-442, "DTC Description"
U1A0A GPS MODULE COMM AV-444, "DTC Description"
U1A0B MIC IN CONN AV-445, "DTC Description"
U1A0C MIC OUT CONN AV-447, "DTC Description"
U1A0E SOS SWITCH ON STUCK AV-449, "DTC Description"
U1A10 AIRBAG SIGNAL AV-451, "DTC Description"
U1A11 TEL MUTE OUTPUT SIGNAL NO CONN AV-452, "DTC Description"

TELEMATICS SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
TELEMATICS SYSTEM
B
AV
ABNWA3250GB

TELEMATICS SYSTEM
ABNIA9696GB

TELEMATICS SYSTEM
AV
ABNIA9697GB

TELEMATICS SYSTEM
ABNIA9698GB

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
JSNIA4482GB M
• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-409, "CONSULT Function".

• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-414, "DTC Index". AV
• Reference 3··· Refer to AV-455, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
O
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items.
tion occurred).
Is the occurred symptom malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect CONSULT and perform a self-diagnosis for “TCU”. Refer to AV-409, "CONSULT Function".
- Record DTC and Freeze Frame Data.
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
1. Check the DTC indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
>> GO TO 5.
Table".
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “TCU” with CONSULT.
YES >> GO TO 1.

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCU
A
NOTE: B
• You must have ALL customer keys before beginning this procedure.
• Each TCU is registered to a specific VIN. TCU’s cannot be swapped between vehicles. Once a TCU is reg-
istered to a vehicle, the TCU cannot be used in another vehicle.
• The replacement TCU must come from Nissan North America parts supply. C
When TCU is replaced, TCU activation operation is required. Refer to AV-422, "Work Procedure".
D
Preparation before activation operation
• Subscribe to telematics service
• Preregister user ID and password (can be performed from owner homepage)
• Open the driver’s door and leave it open during entire procedure. E
F
1.TURN TCU OFF
CONSULT Work support
1. Select TCU ACTIVATE SETTING, then Start. G
2. Select Start, then select Off to turn OFF the TCU.
3. Select End to return to the Work support Test Item screen.
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.SAVE VIN DATA
I
NOTE:
If the VIN data cannot be saved, it will have to be entered manually later in this procedure.
1. Select SAVE VIN DATA, then Start. J
2. Select Start to save the VIN data.
3. Select End to return to the Work support Test Item screen.
K
>> GO TO 3.
3.REMOVE TCU L
Remove the TCU. Refer to AV-459, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 4. M
4.RECORD TCU PART LABEL INFORMATION
AV
Collect, record and have the following information ready:
• VIN.
• International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number of the original TCU. Located on the TCU part label.
O
• International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number of the replacement TCU. Located on the TCU part
label.
• Serial number of the replacement TCU. Located on the TCU part label.
P

ALNIA1892ZZ
>> GO TO 5.
5.INSTALL TCU
Install the TCU. Refer to AV-459, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 6.
6.VIN DATA
Was the VIN data saved during step 2?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 8.
7.WRITE VIN DATA
1. Select WRITE VIN DATA, then Start.
2. Select Start.
3. After the data writing has been completed, select End to return to the Work support Test Item screen.
>> GO TO 9.
8.MANUALLY ENTER VIN DATA
1. Select WRITE VIN (MANUAL INPUT), then Start.
2. Enter the VIN number in the VIN (1ST TIME) field.
3. Enter the VIN number in the VIN (2ND TIME) field.
4. Select Start.
5. After the VIN registration has been completed, select End to return to the Work support Test Item screen.
>> GO TO 9.
9.REGISTER INTELLIGENT KEYS
For initialization and registration of Intelligent Keys, refer to CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-
screen instructions.
>> GO TO 10.
10.CONTACT SIRIUSXM CALL CENTER
NOTICE:

This step must be performed to activate the replacement TCU. If this step is not performed, the TCU will not
be able to communicate with the NissanConnectSM Data Center. A
1. Call the SiriusXM call center. You will be asked for your name, dealer name, and the information collected
in step 4. The call center agent will deactivate the original TCU and activate the replacement TCU. B
2. Wait for the SiriusXM Call center agent to call back, confirming TCU registration.
NOTE:
This step may take 1–2 hours. C
>> GO TO 11.
11.TURN TCU ON D
1. Open driver’s door and leave open.
3. Press the hazard warning flasher switch and leave ON. E
4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Make sure ACC mode is also OFF.
5. Wait 3 minutes and 30 seconds.
NOTE: F
You MUST wait the full 3 minutes and 30 seconds.
During this wait time:
- Keep the driver door open
- Keep the ignition/ACC OFF G
- Do not press the telematics switch
- Do not operate the navigation or audio systems
- Do not change door lock/unlock status H
NOTE:
If any of the bulleted instructions above are not followed, turn the ignition ON, then OFF and perform Step 4
again.
6. Press and hold the telematics switch for more than 10 seconds. I
7. After releasing the telematics switch, turn ignition switch ON.
8. Wait 60 seconds (1 minute).
NOTE: J
You MUST wait the full 60 seconds (1 minute).
- Keep the ignition ON and do not press the telematics switch during this wait time
9. Confirm the telematics switch LED indicator is turned ON.
K
10. Press the hazard warning flasher switch to turn OFF.
>> GO TO 12. L
12.CONFIRM TELEMATICS OPERATION
Press the headset icon on the map screen to initiate a call.
Is the voice menu heard? M
YES >> Work End.
NO >> GO TO 10.
AV

B130D TCU
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
B130D TCU
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TEL LINE OUT ERROR Signal (terminal) Sound signal

B130D
(Telephone line out error) Threshold —
Diagnosis delay time 1 second or more
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Sound signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE
Telematics system function stops
With CONSULT
2. Erase DTC using CONSULT.
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of TELEMATICS” using CONSULT.
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC B130D detected?
1.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN TCU AND AV CONTROL UNIT

2. Disconnect TCU connector M173 and AV control unit connector M163.
3. Check the continuity between TCU connector M173 and AV control unit connector M163.
TCU AV control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
31 39
M173 M163 Yes
32 40
4. Check continuity between TCU connector M173 and ground.
TCU
Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
31
M173 No
32

B130D TCU
YES >> GO TO 2. A
2.CHECK SOUND SIGNAL
B
1. Connect TCU connector M173 and AV control unit connector M163.
3. Check the signal between the terminals of TCU connector M173.
C
TCU connector M173
Terminals Condition Reference value
D
+ −
31 32 When interior sound is input

F
SKIB3609E
Is the inspection result normal? G

H
AV

B1310 TCU
B1310 TCU
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TCU TEMPERATURE ERROR Signal (terminal) —

B1310
(TCU temperature error) Threshold TCU internal temperature is high
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• TCU temperature is high
• TCU
FAIL-SAFE
With CONSULT
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TELEMATICS” using CONSULT.
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC B1310 detected?
1.CHECK AROUND TCU

Check whether there is any factor which causes excessive temperature near TCU.
Was there any factor?
YES >> Correct the cause of the excessive temperature.
NO >> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC B1310 detected?

B13D9 TCU
B13D9 TCU
A

USB CONNECTION Signal (terminal) USB communication signal

B13D9
(USB connection) Threshold — D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• USB harness
• TCU
FAIL-SAFE F
• Telematics system does not function
• Inform the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center about the abnormality
G
H
With CONSULT
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TELEMATICS” using CONSULT. I
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC B13D9 detected?
K
L
1.CHECK USB HARNESS CONNECTION
2. Visually check the USB harness connection between AV control unit and TCU. M
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace USB harness. AV
With CONSULT O
4. Check DTC. P
Is DTC B13D9 detected?

B13E1 TCU
B13E1 TCU
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CAN COMMUNICATION Signal (terminal) AV communication signal

B13E1
(CAN communication) Threshold —
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• TCU
FAIL-SAFE
• Some telematics system does not function
With CONSULT
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC B13E1 detected?

3. Check the continuity between AV control unit connector M163 and TCU connector M173.
AV control unit TCU

Continuity
23 27
M163 M173 Yes
24 26

B2E33 TELEMATICS SWITCH
A

ECALL BUTTON Signal (terminal) SOS switch LED signal

B2E33
(Ecall button) Threshold — D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• SOS switch LED signal circuit
• Telematics switch
FAIL-SAFE F
• Telematics system does not function (Only SOS call does not operate)
• Telematics switch LED indicator turn OFF
G
With CONSULT H
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC B2E33 detected?
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-416, "Wiring Diagram". L
1.CHECK SOS SWITCH LED SIGNAL M

2. Check the voltage between TCU harness connector and ground.
AV
TCU Voltage
Ground
O
M173 5 (—) 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 2. P
NO >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-459, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK SOS SWITCH LED SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
2. Disconnect TCU connector M173 and telematics switch connector.
3. Check the continuity between TCU connector M173 and telematics switch connector R21.

TCU Telematics switch

Continuity
M173 5 R21 1 Yes
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SOS SWITCH LED SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Check the continuity between TCU connector M173 and ground.
TCU
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M173 5 — No
YES >> Replace telematics switch. Refer to AV-460, "Removal and Installation".

B2EF0 TCU
B2EF0 TCU
A

Signal (terminal) —
1
Threshold TCU internal battery level too low D
E
2
Threshold TCU internal battery failure or end of life
INTERNAL BATTERY Diagnosis delay time 1 second or more F

B2EF0
(TCU internal battery error) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
3 G
Threshold TCU internal battery disconnected
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON. H
4
Threshold TCU internal battery over heat
I
POSSIBLE CAUSE
TCU J
FAIL-SAFE
K
L
With CONSULT
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TELEMATICS” using CONSULT. M
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC B2EF0 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-432, "Diagnosis Procedure". AV
O
P
With CONSULT
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC B2EF0 detected?
B2EF0 TCU

A
DESCRIPTION B
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other C
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communica- D
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
E
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON. F
CAN COMM CIRCUIT Signal (terminal) —

U1000
(CAN COMM CIRCUIT) Threshold —
G
POSSIBLE CAUSE
H
FAIL-SAFE
• Some telematics system does not function I
J
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. K
4. Check DTC.
L
M
AV
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

O
CONSULT
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TELEMATICS” using CONSULT. P
4. Check DTC.
YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

DESCRIPTION
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONTROL UNIT(CAN) Signal (terminal) —

U1010
[Control unit(CAN)] Threshold —
POSSIBLE CAUSE
FAIL-SAFE
CONSULT
4. Check DTC.

CONSULT
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TELEMATICS”.
4. Check DTC.
YES >> Replace the TCU. Refer to AV-459, "Removal and Installation".

U1A00 TCU
U1A00 TCU
A

ACC not connected Signal (terminal) —

U1A00
(ACC not connected) Threshold No input of ACC signal D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
TCU
FAIL-SAFE
— F

CONSULT
2. Erase DTC using CONSULT. H
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A00 detected? I
1.CHECK ACC POWER CIRCUIT

Check the ACC power circuit. Refer to AV-454, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. M
AV

U1A01 TCU
U1A01 TCU
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

INTERNAL ERROR (TCU) Signal (terminal) —

U1A01
[Internal error (TCU)] Threshold TCU internal malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
TCU
FAIL-SAFE
With CONSULT
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A01 detected?

CONSULT
4. Check DTC.

U1A03 TCU
U1A03 TCU
A

SIM CARD Signal (terminal) —

U1A03
(SIM card) Threshold — D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
TCU
FAIL-SAFE
• Telematics system function stops F
• Call the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center and inform them that the telematics system cannot be con-
nected.
G
H
With CONSULT
4. Check DTC.
K
L
CONSULT
4. Check DTC. AV
NO >> Inspection End. O

U1A04 TCU
U1A04 TCU
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

VIN UNFINISHED Signal (terminal) —
U1A04 (Vehicle identification number un-
finished) Threshold Vehicle identification number is not written
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Vehicle identification number is not written
• TCU
FAIL-SAFE
Telematics service does not function
With CONSULT
4. Check DTC.
1.PERFORM WRITING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER DATA TO TCU

With CONSULT
1. Select “WRITE VIN (MANUAL INPUT)” in “Work Support” mode of “TELEMATICS” using CONSULT.
2. Touch “Start” on changing screen to write the vehicle identification number data saved into TCU.
Was the writing of vehicle identification number data completed?
YES >> GO TO 2.
CONSULT
4. Check DTC.

U1A06 TEL ANTENNA
U1A06 TEL ANTENNA
A

TEL ANTENNA Signal (terminal) TEL antenna signal

U1A06
(TEL antenna) Threshold No input D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• TEL antenna signal circuit
• Telematics antenna (TEL antenna)
FAIL-SAFE F
• Telematics switch LED indicator turned OFF
(LED indicator flashes 10 times when SOS call switch is pressed.)
• Call the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center and inform them that telematics system cannot be con- G
nected.
H
With CONSULT
4. Check DTC. J
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". K

M
1.CHECK TELEMATICS ANTENNA

Visually check telematics antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-461, "Removal and Installation". AV
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts. O
2.CHECK TCU VOLTAGE
1. Disconnect TCU connector M194. P
3. Check the voltage between TCU connector M194 and ground.
TCU Ground Voltage

M194 47 (—) 5.0 V

U1A06 TEL ANTENNA
Is the check result normal?
YES >> Replace telematics antenna. Refer to AV-461, "Removal and Installation".

U1A09 GPS ANTENNA
U1A09 GPS ANTENNA
A

GPS ANTENNA CONN Signal (terminal) —

U1A09
(GPS antenna conn) Threshold No input of GPS antenna signal D
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• GPS antenna signal circuit
• GPS antenna
• TCU F
FAIL-SAFE
• Telematics system cannot send positional information.
• Inform the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center about the abnormality. G
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H
CONSULT
2. Erase DTC using CONSULT. I
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A09 detected? J
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End. K
L
M
1.CHECK TELEMATICS ANTENNA
Visually check telematics antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-461, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK TCU VOLTAGE O
1. Disconnect TCU harness connector M195.

2. Turn ignition switch ON. P
3. Check voltage between TCU connector M195 and ground.
TCU Voltage
Connector Terminals Ground (Approx.)
M195 49 2.8 V
Is the check result normal?

U1A09 GPS ANTENNA
YES >> Replace telematics antenna. Refer to AV-461, "Removal and Installation".

U1A0A TCU
U1A0A TCU
A

GPS MODULE COMM
U1A0A Malfunction in the GPS module internal to D
(GPS module comm) Threshold
TCU
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
TCU
FAIL-SAFE F
• Telematics system cannot send positional information.
G
H
CONSULT
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A0A detected?
K
L
CONSULT
4. Check DTC.
AV
Is DTC U1A0A detected?
YES >> Replace the TCU. Refer to AV-459, "Removal and Installation".
O

U1A0B MICROPHONE
U1A0B MICROPHONE
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

MIC IN CONN Signal (terminal) —

U1A0B
(MIC in conn) Threshold No input of microphone circuits
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Microphone
• TCU
FAIL-SAFE
• Transmit an own vehicle position to the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center.
CONSULT
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A0B detected?
1.CHECK MIC IN SIGNAL CIRCUIT AND MIC VCC CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

2. Disconnect TCU connector M173 and microphone connector R22.
3. Check continuity between TCU connector M173 and microphone connector R22.
TCU Microphone
Continuity
16 2
M173 17 R22 1 Yes
18 4
4. Check the continuity between TCU connector M173 and ground.
TCU
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal

U1A0B MICROPHONE
17
M173 — No A
18
YES >> GO TO 2. B
2.CHECK MIC VCC VOLTAGE
1. Connect TCU connector M173 and microphone connector R22. C
3. Check voltage between terminals of TCU connector M173.
D
TCU connector M173
Voltage
(+) (−)
(Approx.) E
Terminal Terminal
18 16 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MIC IN SIGNAL G
Check signal between terminals of TCU connector M173.
H
TCU connector M173
Terminal Terminal I
J
K
SKIB3609E

L
NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-462, "Removal and Installation".
AV

U1A0C MICROPHONE
U1A0C MICROPHONE
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

MIC OUT CONN Signal (terminal) —

U1A0C
(MIC out conn) Threshold No output of microphone circuits
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• TCU
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
• Transmit an own vehicle position to the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center.
CONSULT
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A0C detected?
1.CHECK TCU MIC SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

3. Check continuity between TCU connector M173 and AV control unit connector M163.
TCU AV control unit

Continuity
11 48
M173 M163 Yes
12 46
TCU
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M173 12 — No

U1A0C MICROPHONE
YES >> GO TO 2. A
2.CHECK TCU MIC SIGNAL
B
Check signal between TCU connector M173.
TCU connector M173 C

Terminal Terminal
D
12 11 Speak into microphone. E
SKIB3609E
F
G
AV

U1A0E TELEMATICS SWITCH
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SOS SWITCH ON STUCK Signal (terminal) —

U1A0E
(SOS switch ON stuck) Threshold ECALL SW short circuit
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Telematics switch
• TCU
FAIL-SAFE
• Telematics system does not function (Only SOS call does not operate)
• Telematics switch LED indicator turn OFF
With CONSULT
4. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A0E detected?
1.CHECK ECALL SW FOR SHORT CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect TCU connector M173 and telematics switch connector R21.
TCU
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M173 37 — No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TELEMATICS SWITCH
Check continuity between telematics switch terminals.

Telematics switch connector R21 A

Condition Continuity
Terminal Terminal
Switch pressed Yes
3 7 B
Switch released No
YES >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-459, "Removal and Installation". C
NO >> Replace telematics switch. Refer to AV-460, "Removal and Installation".
AV

U1A10 TCU
U1A10 TCU
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

AIRBAG SIGNAL
U1A10 When an abnormal signal from air bag diag-
(Airbag signal) Threshold
nosis sensor is detected
POSSIBLE CAUSE
FAIL-SAFE
• Some telematics system does not function
CONSULT
4. Check DTC.
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT OF AIR BAG

CONSULT
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG”.
4. Check DTC.
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-18, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT OF TELEMATICS
CONSULT
4. Check DTC.

U1A11 TCU
U1A11 TCU
A

TEL MUTE OUTPUT SIGNAL NO Signal (terminal) —

U1A11 CONN Malfunction is detected in audio signal cir- D
(TEL mute output signal NO conn) Threshold
cuits between TCU and AV control unit
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• TCU F
• AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
• Telematics system function stops G
• Call the NISSANCONNECTIONSM Data Center and inform them that the telematics system cannot be con-
nected.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H

With CONSULT I
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TELEMATICS” using CONSULT. J
4. Check DTC.
YES >> Proceed to AV-452, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000014276070 L
1.CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN TCU AND AV CONTROL UNIT AV

3. Check continuity between TCU connector M173 and AV control unit connector M163. O
TCU AV control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals P
31 39
M173 M163 Yes
32 40

U1A11 TCU
TCU
Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
M173 31 No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AUDIO SIGNAL
1. Connect TCU connector M173 and AV control unit connector M163.
3. Check signal between TCU connector M173 terminals.
TCU connector M173

Terminal Terminal Condition Reference value
(+) (−)
When inputting interior

31 32
sound
SKIB3609E


A
B
C
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.
D
Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.
1 Battery power supply 9 (10A)
2 ACC power supply 21 (10A) E
10 Ignition signal 30 (10A)
Are the fuses blown? F
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G
2. Disconnect TCU connector M173.
3. Check voltage between TCU connector M173 and ground. H
TCU Voltage
Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.) I
1 Ignition switch: OFF
M173 2 — Ignition switch: ACC Battery voltage
J
10 Ignition switch: ON
YES >> GO TO 3. K
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
TCU M
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
28
M173 — Yes AV
29
YES >> Inspection End. O

TELEMATICS SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
TELEMATICS SYSTEM
TELEMATICS SYSTEM
Display
Symptom Error message Possible cause
icon
Perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT.
— Telematics unit is not connected.
Refer to AV-409, "CONSULT Function".
Check ON/OFF status of TCU using the data monitor of
CONSULT.
• Replace TCU if it is ON.
The connection to the center failed. Refer to AV-459, "Removal and Installation".
• Turn it ON again if it is OFF. Replace TCU if ON is
switched to OFF.
Refer to AV-459, "Removal and Installation".
Use a cellular phone to check reception.
• If service is available, replace TCU or TEL antenna.
- For TCU replacement, refer to AV-459, "Removal and
Installation".
No service. - For TEL antenna replacement, refer to AV-461, "Re-
moval and Installation".
• If the service is not available, move the vehicle to the
position where service is available and perform the
operation again.
Use a cellular phone to check reception.
• If it is OK, there may be a cause at the NISSANCON-
NECTIONSM Data Center. Check connection after a
short period of time. If there is no problem at the NIS-
Telematics operation SANCONNECTIONSM Data Center, replace TCU or
not available. Service inoperative due to poor reception. TEL antenna.
- For TCU replacement, refer to AV-459, "Removal and
Installation".
- For TEL antenna replacement, refer to AV-461, "Re-
• If it is NG, check connection again after a short period
of time.
Check input of user ID and password from the naviga-
tion setting screen. If malfunction such as input or no
Service not registered. memory despite input is detected, replace AV control
unit.
Check connection after a short period of time.
TCU line is used. Replace TCU if it is frequently displayed.
There may be a cause at the NISSANCONNECTIONSM

Data Center. Check connection after a short period of
time. If there is no problem at the NISSANCONNEC-
The connection to the center failed. TIONSM Data Center, replace TCU or TEL antenna.
• For TCU replacement, refer to AV-459, "Removal and
Installation".
• For TEL antenna replacement, refer to AV-461, "Re-

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
A
B
NOTE:
For Telematics system operation detail information, refer to Navigation system Owner's Manual.
C
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution
Sign up for a subscription to the NISSAN-
CONNECTSM service. For details about D
A subscription for the CONNECT service has not been
subscriptions, contact an NISSAN dealer
established.
or visit the NISSANCONNECTSM Data
Center website.
E
The user ID and password are not entered. Enter the user ID and password.
The communication line is busy. Try again after a short period of time.
The system cannot connect to When the vehicle moves to an area where F
radio waves can be transmitted sufficiently,
the NISSANCONNECTSM Data
communication will be restored. When the
Center. The vehicle is in a location where reception is difficult.
icon on the display shows that the vehicle
is inside the communication area, the sys- G
tem can be used.
When the vehicle moves to an area where
radio waves can be transmitted sufficiently, H
communication will be restored. When the
TCU reception is insufficient.
icon on the display shows that the vehicle
is inside the communication area, the sys-
tem can be used. I
Some of the items that are dis- The vehicle is being driven. Stop the vehi-
played on the menu screen cle in a safe location and apply the parking
cannot be selected. The vehicle is being driven and some menu items are brake before operating the functions. J
disabled. Operate the system after stopping the ve-
Some parts of the screen are
hicle in a safe location and applying the
not displayed
parking brake.
K
Adjust the volume level by operating the
The system does not announce VOL switches located on the control panel
The volume level is set to the minimum.
information. or on the steering switch while the system
is announcing information. L
AV

AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [TELEMATICS SYSTEM]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

AV CONTROL UNIT
AWIIA2142ZZ
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Before disconnecting the AV control unit and battery terminals, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait
NOTE:
• Before replacing AV control unit, perform “Before Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration” to save or
3. Remove AV control unit screws then pull out AV control unit.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

AV CONTROL UNIT
A
AV

TCU
TCU
REMOVAL
NOTE:
Before replacing TCU, perform "SAVE VIN DATA" to save current vehicle specification. For details, refer to AV-
422, "Description".
1. Remove AV control unit. Refer to AV-457, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connectors (A) from TCU (1).
ALNIA1779ZZ
3. Remove screws, then remove TCU with the bracket attached.

4. Remove the bracket from TCU, if necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
2. After installation, perform activation. Refer to AV-422, "Description".

TELEMATICS SWITCH
TELEMATICS SWITCH
A
B
The telematics switch is serviced as part of the room/map lamp. Refer to INL-56, "Removal and Installation".
AV

TEL ANTENNA
TEL ANTENNA
REMOVAL
2. Remove screw to remove TEL antenna from instrument panel.
INSTALLATION

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
A
REMOVAL B
assembly (2). C
: Pawl
D
ALNIA1691ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

MICROPHONE

Audio, Visual & Navigation System: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Audio, Visual & Navigation System: Section

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Audio, Visual & Navigation System: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA

PRECAUTION ............................................... 9 AV CONTROL UNIT .......................................... 29

Revision: May 2016 AV-1 2017 Maxima NAM

U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR .................. 96 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 132

Revision: May 2016 AV-2 2017 Maxima NAM

Revision: May 2016 AV-4 2017 Maxima NAM

ANTENNA AMP. .............................................. 290 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 323 M

Revision: May 2016 AV-5 2017 Maxima NAM

U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIR- PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 363

U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL PREPARATION ......................................... 365

U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT ..................... 351 SYSTEM ........................................................... 368

Revision: May 2016 AV-6 2017 Maxima NAM

Revision: May 2016 AV-7 2017 Maxima NAM

U1A01 TCU ...................................................... 437 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 455

U1A04 TCU ...................................................... 439 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 457

U1A0A TCU ..................................................... 444 TEL ANTENNA ................................................. 461

Revision: May 2016 AV-8 2017 Maxima NAM

Revision: May 2016 AV-9 2017 Maxima NAM

Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000014275713

Revision: May 2016 AV-10 2017 Maxima NAM

Revision: May 2016 AV-11 2017 Maxima NAM

A. View of instrument panel lower console B. View of overhead console

Revision: May 2016 AV-12 2017 Maxima NAM

No. Component Function A

18. Steering switches Refer to AV-16, "Steering Switches".

AV Control Unit INFOID:0000000014275717 L

• AV control unit is located in the center of the instrument panel.

Revision: May 2016 AV-13 2017 Maxima NAM

Revision: May 2016 AV-14 2017 Maxima NAM

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER H

REAR DOOR SPEAKER

Revision: May 2016 AV-15 2017 Maxima NAM

Multifunction Switch INFOID:0000000014275721

• Multifunction switch is located on the center console.

Steering Switches INFOID:0000000014275722

• Hands-free phone, navigation, and audio operations can be per-

USB Interfaces and AUX In Jack INFOID:0000000014275723

Microphone (Hands-free Phone/Voice Recognition) INFOID:0000000014275724

WITH TELEMATICS SYSTEM

Revision: May 2016 AV-16 2017 Maxima NAM

Antennas, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder INFOID:0000000014275725 H

Revision: May 2016 AV-17 2017 Maxima NAM

Revision: May 2016 AV-18 2017 Maxima NAM

1. R203 2. R202 3. Antenna amp. A

Revision: May 2016 AV-19 2017 Maxima NAM

Revision: May 2016 AV-21 2017 Maxima NAM

By comparing the vehicle position detection results found by the

Type Advantage Disadvantage

Revision: May 2016 AV-22 2017 Maxima NAM

• Map-matching does not function correctly when the road on which H

Revision: May 2016 AV-23 2017 Maxima NAM

Confirmation/Adjustment The following functions are available:

Revision: May 2016 AV-24 2017 Maxima NAM

Diagnosis results Unit Connection line

Unit malfunction 1 Red Green O

AV Control Unit Self Diagnosis Results

Revision: May 2016 AV-25 2017 Maxima NAM

Only Unit Part Is Displayed In Red

A Connecting Cable Between Units Is Displayed In Yellow